Alvarion Technologies BA-4900 High Speed Broadband Wireless Access System User Manual BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual

Alvarion Ltd. High Speed Broadband Wireless Access System BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual

Contents

System User Manual

BreezeACCESS® 4900 S/W Version 3.2 July 2005 P/N 214151 System Manual
Legal Rights Legal Rights © Copyright 2005 Alvarion Ltd. All rights reserved. The material contained herein is proprietary, privileged, and confidential and owned by Alvarion or its third party licensors. No disclosure thereof shall be made to third parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Ltd. Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty. Trade Names Alvarion®, BreezeCOM®, WALKair®, WALKnet®, BreezeNET®, BreezeACCESS®, BreezeMANAGE™, BreezeLINK®, BreezeCONFIG™, BreezeMAX™, AlvariSTAR™, MGW™, eMGW™, WAVEXpress™, MicroXpress™, WAVEXchange™, WAVEView™, GSM Network in a Box and TurboWAVE™ and/or other products and/or services referenced here in are either registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of Alvarion Ltd. All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners. Statement of Conditions The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Alvarion Ltd. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual or equipment supplied with it. Warranties and Disclaimers All Alvarion Ltd. (“Alvarion”) products purchased from Alvarion or through any of Alvarion’s authorized resellers are subject to the following warranty and product liability terms and conditions. Exclusive Warranty (a) Alvarion warrants that the Product hardware it supplies and the tangible media on which any software is installed, under normal use and conditions, will be free from significant defects in materials and workmanship for a period of fourteen (14) months from the date of shipment of a given Product to Purchaser (the “Warranty Period”). Alvarion will, at its sole option and as Purchaser’s sole remedy, repair or replace any defective Product in accordance with Alvarion’ standard R&R procedure. (b) With respect to the Firmware, Alvarion warrants the correct functionality according to the attached documentation, for a period of fourteen (14) month from invoice date (the "Warranty Period")". During the Warranty Period, Alvarion may release to its Customers firmware updates, which include additional BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual iii
Legal Rights performance improvements and/or bug fixes, upon availability (the “Warranty”). Bug fixes, temporary patches and/or workarounds may be supplied as Firmware updates. Additional hardware, if required, to install or use Firmware updates must be purchased by the Customer. Alvarion will be obligated to support solely the two (2) most recent Software major releases. ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY PURCHASER’S OR ANY THIRD PERSON'S MISUSE, NEGLIGENCE, IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR IMPROPER TESTING, UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR, OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE, OR BY ACCIDENT, FIRE, LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD. Disclaimer BreezeACCESS 4900 (the “Product”) is intended as a non-critical public safety communication channels and is provided subject to and on condition of this Disclaimer. If the communication channel is CRITICAL, customer shall provide for backup. Alvarion is neither an insurer nor guarantor and does not guarantee that the Product will reduce the time it takes for emergency personnel to respond to or locate the source of any emergency call. Nor does Alvarion guarantee that the Product will be error-free or work all of the time or, in all cases, provide access to emergency services. The Product may be subject to compromise, error or failure due to a variety of reasons, including, but not limited to:  Signals sent by wireless transmitters may be blocked or reflected before reaching their destination.  The equipment, like any other electrical device, is subject to component failure.  Although the Product works on radio frequencies and telephone lines, there may be interference on the radio frequency. ACCORDINGLY, THE PRODUCT IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, AND ALVARION EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, AND TO ALL COMPONENTS THEREOF, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR USE, NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS, OR BASED ON COURSE OF CONDUCT OR TRADE CUSTOM OR USAGE. Alvarion shall not be liable for any damages arising from or related to the use of the Product, including, but not limited to, any emergency calls placed via the Product, or any BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual iv
Legal Rights other cause related to the use or inability to use the Product. Alvarion shall not have any liability for any personal injury, property damage or other loss based on any claim arising from or related to the Product, the use of or inability to use such Product or any other cause related to the Product. Alvarion shall have no liability whatsoever for any direct, indirect, punitive, special, incidental or other consequential damages arising directly or indirectly from the use of or inability to use the Product, including, but not limited to, any damages or injury caused by any error, omission, deletion, defect, interruption, failure of performance, delay in operation or transmission, computer virus, communication line failure, theft or destruction or unauthorized access to, alteration of whether for breach of contract, negligence, tortious behavior, or under any other cause of action. YOUR SOLE REMEDY AND ALVARION’S SOLE LIABILITY IS, IN ALVARION’S DISCRETION, EITHER (i) THE REPLACEMENT OR REPAIR OF THE PRODUCT; OR (ii) THE REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE FOR THE PRODUCT. All use the Product is at your sole risk. You assume all risks of use of this Product and hereby waive and release, to the full extent permitted by law, Alvarion and its subsidiaries and affiliated companies, and their respective employees, officers, directors and agents, from any and all claims, damages, demands, and any other liability relating to or arising from the use of the Product and agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Alvarion and its subsidiaries and affiliated companies, and their respective employees, officers, directors and agents against any and all claims resulting from or arising out of any use of or inability to use the Product. Limitation of Liability (a) ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY, FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF USE, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER ARISING UNDER BREACH OF CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER BASED ON THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. (b) TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER OF ALVARION OR ITS EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT BY PURCHASER, NOR SHALL THE AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES TO ALL PARTIES REGARDING ANY PRODUCT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THAT PRODUCT BY THAT PARTY (EXCEPT IN THE CASE OF A BREACH OF A PARTY’S CONFIDENTIALITY OBLIGATIONS). BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual v
Legal Rights Electronic Emission Notices This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1 This device may not cause harmful interference. 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement The Subscriber Unit equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules and to ETSI EN 301 489-1 rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential environment notwithstanding use in commercial, business and industrial environments. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. The Base Station equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules and to EN 301 489-1 rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in commercial, business and industrial environments. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the user’s own expense. FCC Radiation Hazard Warning To comply with FCC RF exposure requirement, the antenna used for this transmitter must be fixed-mounted on outdoor permanent structures with a separation distance of at least 2 meter from al persons for antennas with a gain up to 28 dBi, and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. R&TTE Compliance Statement This equipment complies with the appropriate essential requirements of Article 3 of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. Safety Considerations For the following safety considerations, “Instrument” means the BreezeACCESS 4900 units’ components and their cables. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual vi
Legal Rights Caution To avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so. Line Voltage Before connecting this instrument to the power line, make sure that the voltage of the power source matches the requirements of the instrument. Radio The instrument transmits radio energy during normal operation. To avoid possible harmful exposure to this energy, do not stand or work for extended periods of time in front of its antenna. The long-term characteristics or the possible physiological effects of Radio Frequency Electromagnetic fields have not been yet fully investigated. Outdoor Unit and Antenna Installation and Grounding Ensure that outdoor units, antennas and supporting structures are properly installed to eliminate any physical hazard to either people or property. Make sure that the installation of the outdoor unit, antenna and cables is performed in accordance with all relevant national and local building and safety codes. Even where grounding is not mandatory according to applicable regulation and national codes, it is highly recommended to ensure that the outdoor unit and the antenna mast (when using external antenna) are grounded and suitable lightning protection devices are used so as to provide protection against voltage surges and static charges. In any event, Alvarion is not liable for any injury, damage or regulation violations associated with or caused by installation, grounding or lightning protection. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual vii
Important Notice Important Notice This user manual is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions:  This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd. Such information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting properly authorized users of the respective Alvarion products.  No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose, disclosed to any person or firm or reproduced by any means, electronic and mechanical, without the express prior written permission of Alvarion Ltd.  The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only. The specifications on which they are based are subject to change without notice.  The software described in this document is furnished under a license. The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that license.  Information in this document is subject to change without notice.  Corporate and individual names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted.  Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty.  The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature, and does not constitute an offer for the sale of the product described herein.  Any changes or modifications of equipment, including opening of the equipment not expressly approved by Alvarion Ltd. will void equipment warranty and any repair thereafter shall be charged for. It could also void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Some of the equipment provided by Alvarion and specified in this manual, is manufactured and warranted by third parties. All such equipment must be installed and handled in full compliance with the instructions provided by such manufacturers as attached to this manual or provided thereafter by Alvarion or the manufacturers. Non compliance with such instructions may result in serious damage and/or bodily harm and/or void the user’s authority to operate the equipment and/or revoke the warranty provided by such manufacturer. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual viii
About This Manual This manual describes the BreezeACCESS 4900 Broadband Wireless Access System Release 3.2 and how to install, operate and manage the system components. This manual is intended for technicians responsible for installing, setting up and operating the BreezeACCESS 4900 system, and for system administrators responsible for managing the system. This manual contains the following chapters and appendices:  Chapter 1 – System description: Describes the BreezeAccess 4900 system and its components.  Chapter 2 – Installation: Describes how to install the system components.  Chapter 3 – Commissioning: Describes how to configure basic parameters, align the Subscriber Unit antenna and validate unit operation.  Chapter 4 – Operation and Administration: Describes how to use the BreezeACCESS 4900 Monitor application for configuring parameters, checking system status and monitoring performance.  Appendix A – Software Version Loading Using TFTP: Describes how to load a new software version using TFTP.  Appendix B – File Download and Upload Using TFTP: Describes how to download and upload configuration files using TFTP. This procedure is also applicable for uploading country code and feature license files.  Appendix C – Using the Restore Link Parameters Utility: Describes how to use the special Restore Link Parameters utility to enable management access to units where wrong or unknown configuration disables regular access to the unit for management purposes.  Appendix D – Preparing the indoor to outdoor cable: Provides details on preparation of the indoor to outdoor Ethernet cable.
About This Manual  Appendix E – Supported MIBs and Traps: Provides a brief description of the parameters contained in the private MIB agent incorporated into the BreezeACCESS 4900 devices. In addition, a description of all traps relevant to the BreezeACCESS 4900 devices is provided.  Appendix F – Parameters Summary: Provides an at a glance summary of the configuration parameters, value ranges and default values.  Appendix G – Using the Feature License Web application: Describes how to use the Feature License web application for getting License Keys.  Appendix H – Troubleshooting. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual x
Contents Chapter 1 - System Description ...............................................................1 1.1 Introducing BreezeACCESS 4900 ............................................................................... 2 1.2 Base Station Equipment............................................................................................... 3 1.2.1 Modular Base Station Equipment ........................................................................ 3 1.2.2 Standalone “Micro-cell” Access Unit.................................................................... 4 1.3 Subscriber Unit............................................................................................................. 6 1.4 Networking Equipment................................................................................................. 7 1.5 Management Systems.................................................................................................. 8 1.5.1 BreezeCONFIG™................................................................................................ 8 1.5.2 AlvariSTAR™....................................................................................................... 8 1.6 Specifications ............................................................................................................. 10 1.6.1 Radio ................................................................................................................. 10 1.6.2 Data Communication ......................................................................................... 11 1.6.3 Configuration and Management ........................................................................ 12 1.6.4 Standards Compliance, General........................................................................ 13 1.6.5 Physical and Electrical....................................................................................... 14 Chapter 2 - Installation ..........................................................................21 2.1 Installation Requirements.......................................................................................... 22 2.1.1 Packing List ....................................................................................................... 22 2.1.2 Indoor-to-Outdoor Cables.................................................................................. 24 2.2 Equipment Positioning Guidelines ........................................................................... 26
Contents 2.3 Installing the Outdoor Unit.........................................................................................27 2.3.1 Pole Mounting the Outdoor Unit.........................................................................27 2.3.2 Connecting the Grounding and Antenna Cables ...............................................29 2.3.3 Connecting the Indoor-to-Outdoor Cable...........................................................30 2.4 Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit ...................................................................32 2.4.1 RESET Button Functionality ..............................................................................33 2.5 Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment.......................................................34 2.5.1 BS-SH Slot Assignment .....................................................................................34 2.5.2 BS-PS-AC Power Supply Module ......................................................................35 2.5.3 BS-PS-DC Power Supply Module......................................................................36 2.5.4 BS-AU Network Interface Module ......................................................................37 2.5.5 Installing the BS-SH Chassis and Modules........................................................38 Chapter 3 - Commissioning....................................................................41 3.1 Configuring Basic Parameters...................................................................................42 3.2 Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna ......................................................................45 3.3 Configuring the Subscriber Unit’s Maximum Modulation Level.............................46 3.4 Operation Verification.................................................................................................48 3.4.1 Outdoor Unit Verification....................................................................................48 3.4.2 Indoor Unit Verification.......................................................................................51 3.4.3 Verifying the Ethernet Connection (Modular Base station)................................52 3.4.4 Verifying the Indoor-to-Outdoor Connection (Modular Base Station).................52 3.4.5 Verifying Data Connectivity................................................................................52 Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration.............................................53 4.1 Working with the Monitor Program ...........................................................................54 4.1.1 Accessing the Monitor Program Using Telnet....................................................54 4.1.2 Common Operations..........................................................................................55 BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual xii
Contents 4.2 Menus and Parameters .............................................................................................. 57 4.2.1 Main Menu......................................................................................................... 57 4.2.2 Info Screens Menu............................................................................................. 57 4.2.3 Unit Control Menu.............................................................................................. 62 4.2.4 Basic Configuration Menu.................................................................................. 74 4.2.5 Site Survey Menu .............................................................................................. 77 4.2.6 Advanced Configuration Menu .......................................................................... 90 Appendix A - Software Version Loading Using TFTP...........................145 Appendix B - File Download and Upload Using TFTP ..........................149 Appendix C - Using the Set Factory Defaults Utility ...........................153 Appendix D - Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable.....................155 Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps.............................................159 E.1 System Object Identifiers......................................................................................... 160 E.2 breezeAccessVLMib ................................................................................................. 162 E.2.1 System Information Parameters ...................................................................... 162 E.2.2 Unit Control Parameters .................................................................................. 165 E.2.3 Network Management Parameters.................................................................. 168 E.2.4 IP Parameters.................................................................................................. 170 E.2.5 Bridge Parameters........................................................................................... 171 E.2.6 Air Interface Parameters.................................................................................. 174 E.2.7 Service Parameters ......................................................................................... 188 E.2.8 User Filtering Parameters................................................................................ 193 E.2.9 Security Parameters ........................................................................................ 195 E.2.10 Performance Parameters................................................................................. 196 E.2.11 Site Survey Parameters................................................................................... 198 BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual xiii
Contents E.3 Supported Traps .......................................................................................................209 E.3.1 Trap Variables..................................................................................................209 E.3.2 Private Traps....................................................................................................210 Appendix F - Parameters Summary .....................................................213 F.1 Unit Control Parameters...........................................................................................214 F.2 IP Parameters ............................................................................................................216 F.3 Air Interface Parameters...........................................................................................217 F.4 Network Management Parameters ..........................................................................219 F.5 Bridge Parameters ....................................................................................................220 F.6 Performance Parameters..........................................................................................222 F.7 Service Parameters...................................................................................................223 F.8 Security Parameters .................................................................................................225 Appendix G - Using the Feature License Web Application .................227 G.1 The Feature License Web Application ....................................................................228 G.1.1 Loading License Strings to Devices.................................................................230 Appendix H - Troubleshooting .............................................................233 H.1 Ethernet Port Connection Problems .......................................................................234 H.2 SU Association Problems ........................................................................................235 H.3 Low Throughput Problems ......................................................................................236 BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual xiv
Figures Figure 2-1: 3" Pole Installation Using Special Brackets.............................................................................. 28 Figure 2-2: Bottom Panel of the Outdoor Unit (without the seal assembly)................................................ 29 Figure 2-3: The Waterproof Seal ................................................................................................................ 30 Figure 2-4: IDU PS 1073 Front Panel......................................................................................................... 32 Figure 2-5: BS-SH Chassis Slot Assignment..............................................................................................34 Figure 2-6: BS-PS-AC Front Panel............................................................................................................. 35 Figure 2-7: BS-PS-DC Front Panel............................................................................................................. 36 Figure 2-8: BS-AU Front Panel................................................................................................................... 37 Figure 4-1: Main Menu (Administrator Level) ............................................................................................. 55 Figure D-1: Ethernet Connector Pin Assignments.................................................................................... 156
Tables Table 1-1: AU Detached Antennas ............................................................................................................... 4 Table 1-2: Subscriber Unit ODU Types ........................................................................................................ 6 Table 1-3: Radio Specifications .................................................................................................................. 10 Table 1-4: Data Communication ................................................................................................................. 11 Table 1-5: Configuration and Management ................................................................................................ 12 Table 1-6: Standards Compliance, General................................................................................................ 13 Table 1-7: Mechanical Specifications, Subscriber Unit............................................................................... 14 Table 1-8: Connectors, Subscriber Unit...................................................................................................... 14 Table 1-9: Electrical Specifications, Subscriber Unit .................................................................................. 15 Table 1-10: Mechanical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment ................................................ 16 Table 1-11: Connectors, Modular Base Station Equipment........................................................................ 17 Table 1-12: Electrical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment.................................................... 17 Table 1-13: Mechanical Specifications, Stand Alone Access Unit ............................................................. 18 Table 1-14: Connectors, Stand Alone Access Unit..................................................................................... 18 Table 1-15: Electrical Specifications, Stand Alone Access Unit ................................................................. 19 Table 1-16: Environmental Specifications................................................................................................... 19 Table 2-1: Approved Category 5E Ethernet Cables ................................................................................... 25 Table 2-2: BS-PS LED Functionality........................................................................................................... 36 Table 3-1: Basic Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 42 Table 3-2: Recommended Maximum Modulation Level ............................................................................. 47 Table 3-3: AU-ODU LEDs........................................................................................................................... 48 Table 3-4: SU-ODU LEDs........................................................................................................................... 49 Table 3-5: SU-ODU SNR Bar LED Functionality ........................................................................................ 50 Table 3-6: BS-AU LEDs .............................................................................................................................. 51
Tables Table 3-7: PS1073 SU IDU / AU-SA IDU LEDs ..........................................................................................52 Table 4-1: Default Passwords .....................................................................................................................54 Table 4-2: Sub-Band Dependent Parameters.............................................................................................61 Table 4-3: Parameters not reset after Set Complete Factory/Operator Defaults........................................64 Table 4-4: Parameters that are not reset after Set Partial Factory/Operator Defaults................................65 Table 4-5: Authentication and Association Process....................................................................................85 Table 4-6: VLAN Management Port Functionality.....................................................................................114 Table 4-7: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Access Link............................................................................115 Table 4-8: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Trunk Link ..............................................................................116 Table 4-9: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Hybrid Link .............................................................................116 Table 4-10: Recommended Maximum Modulation Level..........................................................................128 BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual xviii
11 Chapter 1 - System Description In This Chapter:  Introducing BreezeACCESS 4900, page 2  Base Station Equipment, page 3  Subscriber Unit, page 6  Networking Equipment, page 7  Management Systems, page 8  Specifications, page 10
Chapter 1 - System Description 1.1 Introducing BreezeACCESS 4900 BreezeACCESS 4900 is a high capacity, IP services oriented Broadband Wireless Access system operating in the 4.9 GHz licensed spectrum band allocated for public safety. The system employs wireless packet switched data technology to support high-speed IP services with a network connection that is always on. The system is designed for both Point-to-Point and Point-to Multipoint configurations, supporting data, VoIP and video applications. The system supports Virtual LANs based on IEEE 802.1Q, enabling secure operation and Virtual Private Network (VPN) services. The system supports layer-2 traffic prioritization based on IEEE 802.1p and layer-3 traffic prioritization based on either IP ToS Precedence (RFC791) or DSCP (RFC2474). It also supports traffic prioritization based on UDP and/or TCP port ranges. BreezeACCESS 4900 uses advanced security mechanisms, including WEP128, AES128 and FIPS compliance. Using OFDM modem technology and high power radios, BreezeACCESS 4900 offers an unmatched combination of wide coverage, high capacity and value-added features to provide wireless connectivity that works also in near and non-line-of-site (NLOS) conditions. Alvarion’s Complete Spectrum solution enables the BreezeACCESS 4900 to integrate seamlessly into other BreezeACCESS networks. Supporting both fixed and mobile platforms at multiple frequency bands, the Complete Spectrum enables simultaneous deployment of systems at 900 MHz, 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 4.9 GHz, and the entire 5 GHz band. A BreezeACCESS 4900 system comprises the following:  Customer Premise Equipment (CPE): BreezeACCESS 4900 Subscriber Units (SUs).  Base Station Equipment (BS): BreezeACCESS 4900 Access Units and supporting equipment.  Networking Equipment: Standard Switches/Routers supporting connections to the backbone and/or Internet.  Management Systems: SNMP-based Management, Billing and Customer Care, and other Operation Support Systems. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 2
Base Station Equipment 1.2 Base Station Equipment The Access Units, installed at the Base Station site, provide all the functionality necessary to communicate with the Subscriber Units and to connect to the backbone of the network. There are 2 lines of Access Units with different architectures:  Modular Base Station Equipment  Standalone “Micro-Cell” Access Unit 1.2.1 Modular Base Station Equipment The Base Station Equipment is based on the BS-SH 3U chassis, which is suitable for installation in 19-inch racks. The chassis contains one or two Power Supply modules and has 8 slots that can accommodate BS-AU Network Interface modules. These slots can also accommodate various combinations of other modules, including Network Interface (BS-AU) modules for Access Units operating in any of the bands supported by BreezeACCESS VL equipment or BreezeACCESS equipment using GFSK modulation, including BreezeACCESS 900, BreezeACCESS II, BreezeACCESS XL and BreezeACCESS V. It can also accommodate a BS-GU GPS and Alarms module to support GPS-based synchronization of BreezeACCESS systems using Frequency Hopping radios. Two different types of power supply modules are available for the BreezeACCESS 4900 chassis: The BS-PS-DC that is powered from a -48 VDC power source, and the BS-PS-AC, powered from the 110/220 VAC mains. The optional use of two power supply modules ensures fail-safe operation through power supply redundancy. When the same chassis is used also for Access Unit modules belonging to other BreezeACCESS families using GFSK modulation, then one BS-PS power supply (AC or DC) should be used to provide power to the BreezeACCESS 4900 Access Units, and a different power supply module, suitable for GFSK equipment, is required for powering the BreezeACCESS GFSK Access Units. Each BS-AU module, together with its outdoor AU-D/E-BS-ODU radio unit and an antenna comprise an AU-D/E-BS Access Unit that serves a single sector/cell. One AU-BS Access Unit can serve up to 512 Subscriber Units (124 when Data Encryption is used). System Description 3
Chapter 1 - System Description The AU-D/E-BS-ODU outdoor unit contains the processing and radio modules and connects to an external antenna using a short RF cable. E model units, such as the AU-E-BS-4900, are supplied without an antenna and are primarily intended for Point-to-Point applications. D model units, namely AU-D-BS-4900-360 and AU-D-BS-4900-120, are supplied with a detached antenna, as listed in Table 1-1: Table 1-1: AU Detached Antennas Unit Antenna Band (GHz) Horizontal Beam Width Gain (dBi) AU-D-BS-4900-120 AU-Ant-4.9G-15-120 4.900-5.100 120° 15 AU-D-BS-4900-360 AU-Ant-4.9G-9-Omni 4.900-5.100 360° 9 The BS-AU indoor module connects to the network through a standard IEEE 802.3 Ethernet 10/100BaseT (RJ 45) interface. The indoor module is connected to the outdoor unit via a Category 5E Ethernet cable. This cable carries Ethernet traffic between the indoor module and the outdoor unit, and also transfers power (54 VDC) and control from the indoor module to the outdoor unit. 1.2.2 Standalone “Micro-cell” Access Unit The standalone AU-D/E-SA Access Unit is very similar to the AU-D/E-BS unit. The AU-D/E-SA-ODU outdoor unit is very similar to the AU-D/E-BS-ODU outdoor unit (identical functionality, but the units are not interchangeable). Units are differentiated based on the availability of an antenna: E model units are supplied without an antenna, while D model units are supplied with a detached antenna. Available units are:  AU-D-SA-4900-360 (Standalone AU with a 9 dBi omni antenna)  AU-D-SA-4900-120 (Standalone AU with a 15 dBi, 120° sector antenna)  AU-E-SA-4900 (Standalone AU) The available antennas for D model units are the same as those of the AU-D-BS Access Unit. The main difference is in the structure of the indoor part; in the AU-D/E-SA Access Unit the indoor unit is a standalone desktop or wall-mountable BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 4
Base Station Equipment unit (the same Universal IDU that is also used in the SU) rather than a 19” module. The AU-SA Access Unit can serve up to 512 Subscriber Units (124 when Data Encryption is used). The IDU connects to the network through a standard IEEE 802.3 Ethernet 10/100BaseT (RJ 45) interfaces and is powered from the 110/220 VAC mains. The indoor unit is connected to the outdoor unit via a Category 5E Ethernet cable. This cable carries Ethernet traffic between the indoor and the outdoor units, and also transfers power (54 VDC) and control from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit. NOTE The AU-D/E-SA-ODU and the AU-D/E-BS-ODU are not interchangeable: The AU-D/E-SA-ODU cannot be used with the BS-AU; the AU-D/E-BS-ODU cannot be used with the standalone IDU. System Description 5
Chapter 1 - System Description 1.3 Subscriber Unit The Subscriber Unit (SU) installed at locations that require service, enables the customer data connection to the Access Unit. The Subscriber Unit provides an efficient platform for high speed Internet and Intranet services, supporting single or multiple end users. The use of packet switching technology provides the user with a connection to the network that is always on, enabling immediate access to services. The Subscriber Unit comprise a desktop or wall-mountable Indoor Unit (IDU) and an outdoor unit that contains the processing and radio modules. Several ODU types are available to support different requirements, as detailed in Table 1-2: Table 1-2: Subscriber Unit ODU Types SU Type Antenna Description SU-A-ODU Vertically polarized high-gain flat antenna integrated on the front panel SU-E-ODU A connection to an external antenna The Subscriber Unit supports a gross rate of up to 27 Mbps and can bridge a full LAN. The IDU provides the interface to the user’s equipment and is powered from the 110/220 VAC mains. The customer's data equipment is connected via a standard IEEE 802.3 Ethernet 10/100BaseT (RJ 45) interface. The indoor unit is connected to the outdoor unit via a Category 5E Ethernet cable. This cable carries Ethernet traffic between the indoor and the outdoor units, and also transfers power (54 VDC) and control from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 6
Networking Equipment 1.4 Networking Equipment The Base Station equipment is connected to the backbone through standard data communication and telecommunication equipment. The 10/100BaseT ports of the AU modules can be connected directly to a multi-port router or to an Ethernet switch connected to a router. The point-to-point link from the Base Station to the backbone can be either wired or wireless. Data to the Internet is routed to the backbone through standard routers. System Description 7
Chapter 1 - System Description 1.5 Management Systems The end-to-end IP-based architecture of the system enables full management of all components, from any point in the system. BreezeACCESS 4900 components can be managed using standard management tools through SNMP agents that implement standard and proprietary MIBs for remote setting of operational modes and parameters. The same SNMP management tools can also be used to manage other system components including switches, routers and transmission equipment. Security features incorporated in BreezeACCESS 4900 units restrict access for management purposes to specific IP addresses and/or directions, that is, from the Ethernet and/or wireless link. In addition, the Ethernet WAN can be used to connect to other Operation Support Systems including servers, Customer Care systems and AAA (Authentication, Authorization and Admission) tools. 1.5.1 BreezeCONFIG™ The BreezeCONFIG for BreezeACCESS 4900 utility is an SNMP-based application designed to manage BreezeACCESS 4900 system components and upgrade unit software versions. The system administrator can use the BreezeCONFIG utility to control a large number of units from a single location. In addition, BreezeCONFIG enables you to load an updated configuration file to multiple units simultaneously, thus radically reducing the time spent on unit configuration maintenance. 1.5.2 AlvariSTAR™ AlvariSTAR is a comprehensive Carrier-Class network management system for Alvarion’s Broadband Wireless Access products-based Networks. AlvariSTAR is designed for today’s most advanced Network Operation Centers (NOCs), providing the network Operation, Administration and Maintenance (OA&M) staff and managers with all the network surveillance, monitoring and configuration capabilities that they require in order to effectively manage the BWA network while keeping the resources and expenses at a minimum. AlvariSTAR is designed to offer the network’s OA&M staff with a unified, scalable and distributable network management system. The AlvariSTAR system uses a distributed client-server architecture, which provides a robust, scalable and fully redundant network management system in which all single points of failure can be avoided. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 8
Management Systems AlvariSTAR provides the following BWA network management functionality:  Device Discovery  Device Inventory  Topology  Fault Management  Configuration Management  Performance Monitoring  Device embedded software upgrade  Security Management  Northbound interface to other Network Management Systems or OSS. System Description 9
Chapter 1 - System Description 1.6 Specifications 1.6.1 Radio Table 1-3: Radio Specifications Item Description Frequency 4.940 – 4.990 GHz Operation Mode Time Division Duplex (TDD) Channel Bandwidth 10 MHz / 5 MHz Central Frequency Resolution 5 MHz Antenna Port (AU-D-BS/SA-ODU) N-Type, 50 ohm Max. Input Power (at antenna port) -40 dBm typical Maximum Output Power TBD SU-A-ODU Integral Antenna 20 dBi, 10.5o horizontal x 10.5o vertical, vertical or horizontal polarization, compliant with EN 302 085 V1.1.1 Range 1, Class TS 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 AU-D Detached Antennas  AU-Ant-4.9G-15-120: 15 dBi, 4.900-5.100 GHz, 124o horizontal x 6.5o vertical sector antenna, vertical polarization, compliant with EN 302 085 V1.1.2 CS3.  AU-Ant-4.9G-9-Omni: 9 dBi, 4.900-5.100 GHz, 360o horizontal x 8o vertical, vertical polarization. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 10
Specifications Table 1-3: Radio Specifications Item Description Modulation Level1 Sensitivity 5 MHz bandwidth Sensitivity 10 MHz bandwidth Min. SNR 1 -93 dBm -92 dBm 6 dB 2 -92 dBm -91 dBm 7 dB 3 -91 dBm -89 dBm 9 dB 4 -89 dBm -87 dBm 11 dB 5 -86 dBm -84 dBm 14 dB 6 -82 dBm -80 dBm 18 dB 7 -77 dBm -76 dBm 22 dB Sensitivity, typical (dBm at antenna port, PER<10%) 8 -75 dBm -74 dBm 23 dB Modulation OFDM modulation, 64 FFT points; BPSK, QPSK, QAM16, QAM64 1 Modulation Level indicates the radio transmission rate and the modulation scheme. Modulation Level 1 is for the lowest radio rate and modulation scheme. 1.6.2 Data Communication Table 1-4: Data Communication Item Description Standard compliance IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD VLAN Support Based on IEEE 802.1Q Layer-2 Traffic Prioritization Based on IEEE 802.1p Layer-3 Traffic Prioritization IP Precedence ToS (RFC791) DSCP (RFC2474) Layer 4 Traffic Prioritization UDP/TCP destination ports System Description 11
Chapter 1 - System Description 1.6.3 Configuration and Management Table 1-5: Configuration and Management Type Standard Management  Monitor program via Telnet  SNMP  Configuration upload/download Management Access From Wired LAN, Wireless Link Management access protection  Multilevel password  Configuration of remote access direction (from Ethernet only, from wireless link only or from both)  Configuration of IP addresses of authorized stations Security  Authentication messages encryption option  Data encryption option  Selection between WEP, AES/OCB and AES/CCM 128-bit encryption standards  ESSID SNMP Agents SNMP ver 1 client MIB II, Bridge MIB, Private BreezeACCESS MIB Allocation of IP parameters Configurable or automatic (DHCP client) Software upgrade  FTP  TFTP Configuration upload/download  FTP  TFTP BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 12
Specifications 1.6.4 Standards Compliance, General Table 1-6: Standards Compliance, General Type Standard EMC FCC Part 15 class B Safety UL 60950-1 Radio FCC Part 90 FCC Part 15 System Description 13
Chapter 1 - System Description 1.6.5 Physical and Electrical 1.6.5.1 Subscriber Unit 1.6.5.1.1 Mechanical Table 1-7: Mechanical Specifications, Subscriber Unit Unit Structure Dimensions (cm) Weight (kg) General An IDU indoor unit and an SU-A-ODU outdoor unit with an integral antenna IDU PS1073 Plastic box (black), desktop or wall mountable 14 x 6.6 x 3.5 0.3 SU-A-ODU Metal box plus an integral antenna in a cut diamond shape in a plastic enclosure, poll or wall mountable 43.2 x 30.2 x 5.9 1.85 1.6.5.1.2 Connectors Table 1-8: Connectors, Subscriber Unit Unit Connector Description ETHERNET 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45) Cable connection to a PC: crossed Cable connection to a hub: straight RADIO 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45) 2 embedded LEDs in PS1036 IDU AC IN 3 pin AC power plug SU-A-ODU INDOOR 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45), protected by a waterproof sealing assembly BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 14
Specifications 1.6.5.1.3 Electrical Table 1-9: Electrical Specifications, Subscriber Unit Unit Details General Power consumption: 25W IDU AC power input: 85-265 VAC, 50-60 Hz SU-A-ODU 54 VDC from the IDU over the indoor-outdoor Ethernet cable System Description 15
Chapter 1 - System Description 1.6.5.2 Modular Base Station Equipment 1.6.5.2.1 Mechanical Table 1-10: Mechanical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment Unit Structure Dimensions (cm) Weight (kg) BS-SH 19" rack (3U) or desktop 13 x 48.2 x 25.6 4.76 BS-PS-DC DC power supply module 12.9 x 7.0 x 25.3 1.2 BS-PS-AC AC power supply module 12.9 x 7.0 x 25.3 1.2 BS-AU Indoor module of the AU-D-BS access unit 12.9 x 3.5 x 25.5 0.15 AU-D-BS-ODU pole or wall mountable 30.6 x 12.0 x 4.7 1.85 AU-Ant-4.9G-15-120 2"-4" pole mountable 55 x 25 x 1.7 1.5 BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 16
Specifications 1.6.5.2.2 Connectors Table 1-11: Connectors, Modular Base Station Equipment Unit Connector Description 10/100 BaseT 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45) with 2 embedded LEDs. Cable connection to a PC: crossed Cable connection to a hub: straight BS-AU RADIO 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45) with 2 embedded LEDs INDOOR 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45), protected by a waterproof sealing assembly AU-D-BS-ODU ANT N-Type jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected BS-PS-AC AC-IN 3-PIN AC power plug BS-PS-DC -48 VDC 3 pin DC D-Type 3 power pins plug Amphenol 717TWA3W3PHP2V4RRM6 Antenna RF N-Type jack (on a 1.5m cable in the Omni-8-5.8) 1.6.5.2.3 Electrical Table 1-12: Electrical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment Unit Details General 240W max. for a fully equipped chassis (1 PS, 6 AU) BS-PS-AC AC power input: 85-265 VAC, 47-65 Hz DC power output: 54 V; 3.3 V BS-PS-DC DC power input: -48 VDC nominal (-34 to -72), 10 A max DC power output: 54 V; 3.3 V BS-AU 3.3 VDC, 54 VDC from the power supply module(s) via the back plane AU-D-BS-ODU 54 VDC from the BS-AU over the indoor-outdoor Ethernet cable AU-D-BS (IDU+ODU) Power consumption: 30W System Description 17
Chapter 1 - System Description 1.6.5.3 Standalone Access Unit 1.6.5.3.1 Mechanical Table 1-13: Mechanical Specifications, Stand Alone Access Unit Unit Structure Dimensions (cm) Weight (kg) General An IDU indoor unit and an AU-D-BS-ODU outdoor unit connected to a detached antenna IDU PS1073 Plastic box (black), desktop or wall mountable 14 x 6.6 x 3.5 0.3 AU-D-SA-ODU Poll or wall mountable 30.6 x 12 x 4.7 1.85 AU-Ant-4.9G-15-120 2"-4" pole mountable 55 x 25 x 1.7 1.5 AU-Ant-4.9G-9-Omni 1.5”-3” pole mountable 46 cm high, 5.5 cm base diameter 0.6 1.6.5.3.2 Connectors Table 1-14: Connectors, Stand Alone Access Unit Unit Connector Description ETHERNET 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45) Cable connection to a PC: crossed Cable connection to a hub: straight RADIO 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45). 2 embedded LEDs in the PS1036 IDU AC IN 3-PIN AC power plug INDOOR 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45), protected by a waterproof sealing assembly AU-D-SA-ODU ANT N-Type jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected Antenna RF N-Type jack BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 18
Specifications 1.6.5.3.3 Electrical Table 1-15: Electrical Specifications, Stand Alone Access Unit Unit Details General Power consumption: 25W IDU AC power input: 85-265 VAC, 50-60 Hz AU-D-SA-ODU 54 VDC from the IDU over the indoor-outdoor Ethernet cable 1.6.5.4 Environmental Table 1-16: Environmental Specifications Type Unit Details Outdoor units -40 o C to 55 o C Operating temperature Indoor equipment 0 o C to 40 o C Outdoor units 5%-95% non condensing, weather protected Operating humidity Indoor equipment 5%-95% non condensing System Description 19
22 Chapter 2 - Installation In This Chapter:  Installation Requirements, page 22  Equipment Positioning Guidelines, page 26  Installing the Outdoor Unit, page 27  Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit, page 32  Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment, page 34
Chapter 2 - Installation 2.1 Installation Requirements This section describes all the supplies required to install the BreezeACCESS 4900 system components and the items included in each installation package. 2.1.1 Packing List 2.1.1.1 Subscriber Unit The SU installation kit includes the following components:  IDU indoor unit with a wall mounting kit  Mains power cord  Outdoor Unit:  SU-A-ODU outdoor unit with an integrated vertically polarized antenna OR  SU-E-ODU outdoor unit with a connection to an external antenna  Pole mounting kit for the ODU  20m Category 5E indoor-to-outdoor Ethernet cable with shielded RJ-45 connectors 2.1.1.2 Modular Base Station Equipment This section describes the items included in the installation packages for each Modular Base Station system component. 2.1.1.2.1 BS-SH Base Station Chassis The BS-SH installation kit includes the following components:  BS-SH chassis with blank panels  Rubber legs for optional desktop installation 2.1.1.2.2 AU-D/E-BS Access Unit The AU-D/E-BS and installation kit includes the following components:  BS-AU Network Interface module BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 22
Installation Requirements  AU-D/E-BS-ODU outdoor unit  Pole mounting kit for the AU-D/E-BS-ODU  In AU-D-BS kits: Antenna, including pole mounting hardware  RF cable 2.1.1.2.3 BS-PS-AC Power Supply Up to two BS-PS-AC power supply modules can be included in each Base Station chassis. The BS-PS-AC installation kit includes the following components:  BS-PS-AC power supply module  Mains power cord 2.1.1.2.4 BS-PS-DC Power Supply Up to two BS-PS-DC power supply modules can be included in each Base Station chassis. The BS-PS-DC installation kit includes the following components:  BS-PS-DC power supply module  DC power cable 2.1.1.3 AU-D/E-SA Standalone Access Unit The AU-D/E-SA installation kit includes the following components:  IDU indoor unit with a wall mounting kit  Mains power cord  AU-D/E-SA-ODU outdoor unit with an integrated antenna  Pole mounting kit for the AU-D/E-SA-ODU  In AU-D-SA kits: Antenna, including pole mounting hardware  RF cable 2.1.1.4 Additional Installation Requirements The following items are also required to install the BreezeACCESS 4900 system components: Installation 23
Chapter 2 - Installation  Indoor-to-outdoor Category 5E Ethernet cable with shielded RJ-45 connectors * (available in different lengths. For more details refer to section 2.1.2 )  Ethernet cable (straight for connecting to a hub/switch etc., crossed for connecting directly to a PC’s NIC)  Crimping tool for RJ-45 connectors  Antenna, for E model units supplied without an antenna  Ground cables with an appropriate termination  Mains plug adapter or termination plug (if the power plug on the supplied AC power cord does not fit local power outlets)  Portable PC with Ethernet card and Telnet software or BreezeCONFIG for BreezeACCESS 4900* application and a crossed Ethernet cable  Installation tools and materials, including appropriate means (e.g. a pole) for installing the outdoor unit. NOTE Items marked with an asterisk (*) are available from Alvarion. 2.1.2 Indoor-to-Outdoor Cables NOTE The length of the Ethernet cable connecting the indoor unit to the user's equipment, together with the length of the Indoor-to-Outdoor cable, should not exceed 100 meters. Use only Category 5E Ethernet cables from approved manufacturers, listed in Table 2-1. Consult with Alvarion specialists on the suitability of other cables. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 24
Installation Requirements Table 2-1: Approved Category 5E Ethernet Cables Manufacturer Part Number Superior Cables Ltd. www.cvalim.co.il 612098 HES Cabling Systems www.hescs.com H5E-00481 Teldor www.teldor.com 8393204101 Southbay Holdings Limited 11th Fl., 15, Lane 347, Jong Jeng Rd. Shin Juang City, Taipei County Taiwan, R.O.C Attn: Eva Lin Tel. 886-2-2832 3339 Fax. 886-2-2206 0081 E-mail: eva@south-bay.com.tw TSM2404A0D Installation 25
Chapter 2 - Installation 2.2 Equipment Positioning Guidelines This section provides key guidelines for selecting the optimal installation locations for the various BreezeACCESS 4900 system components. CAUTION ONLY experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and, wherever applicable, are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities should install outdoor units and antennas. Failure to do so may void the BreezeACCESS 4900 product warranty and may expose the end user or Service Provider to legal and financial liabilities. Alvarion and its resellers or distributors are not liable for injury, damage or regulation violations associated with the installation of Outdoor Units or antennas. Select the optimal locations for the equipment using the following guidelines:  The outdoor unit can be either pole or wall mounted. Its location should enable easy access to the unit for installation and testing.  The higher the placement of the antenna, the better the achievable link quality.  AU-ODU units should be installed as close as possible to the antenna.  The antenna connected to the AU-ODU unit, should be installed so as to provide coverage to all Subscriber Units (SUs) within its service area. NOTE The recommended minimum distance between any two antennas serving adjacent sectors is 2 meters. The recommended minimum distance between two antennas serving opposite cells (installed back-to-back) is 5 meters.  The antenna of the SU (integrated on the front side of SU-A-ODU and SU-A-H-ODU unit) should be installed to provide a direct, or near line of sight with the Base Station antenna. The antenna should be aligned to face the Base Station.  The indoor equipment should be installed as close as possible to the location where the indoor-to-outdoor cable enters the building. The location of the indoor equipment should take into account its connection to a power outlet and the CPE. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 26
Installing the Outdoor Unit 2.3 Installing the Outdoor Unit The following sections describe how to install the outdoor units, including pole mounting the ODU, and connecting the indoor-to-outdoor, grounding and RF cables. NOTE Ensure that outdoor units, antennas and supporting structures are properly installed to eliminate any physical hazard to either people or property. Make sure that the installation of the outdoor unit, antenna and cables is performed in accordance with all relevant national and local building and safety codes. Even where grounding is not mandatory according to applicable regulation and national codes, it is highly recommended to ensure that the outdoor unit and the antenna pole (when using external antenna) are grounded and suitable lightning protection devices are used so as to provide protection against voltage surges and static charges. In any event, Alvarion is not liable for any injury, damage or regulation violations associated with or caused by installation, grounding or lightning protection. 2.3.1 Pole Mounting the Outdoor Unit The Outdoor Unit can be mounted on a pole using one of the following options:  Special brackets and open-ended bolts are supplied with each unit. There are two pairs of threaded holes on the back of the unit, enabling the special brackets to be mounted on diverse pole diameters.  Special grooves on the sides of the unit enable the use of metal bands to secure the unit to a pole. The bands must be 9/16 inches wide and at least 12 inches long. The metal bands are not included with the installation package. NOTE Be sure to mount the unit with the bottom panel, which includes the LED indicators, facing downward. Installation 27
Chapter 2 - Installation Figure 2-1 illustrates the method of mounting an outdoor unit on a pole, using the brackets and open-ended bolts. Figure 2-1: 3" Pole Installation Using Special Brackets NOTE Be sure to insert the open ended bolts with the grooves pointing outward, as these grooves enable you to use a screwdriver to fasten the bolts to the unit. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 28
Installing the Outdoor Unit 2.3.2 Connecting the Grounding and Antenna Cables The Grounding screw (marked ╤) is located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit. The Antenna RF connector (marked ) is located on the top panel of the AU-ODU. To connect the grounding cable: 1 Connect one end of a grounding cable to the grounding terminal and tighten the grounding screw firmly. 2 Connect the other end of the grounding cable to a good ground (earth) connection. To connect the RF cable (units with external antenna): 1 Connect one end of the coaxial RF cable to the RF connector on the top panel of the unit 2 Connect the other end of the RF cable to the antenna. 3 The RF connectors should be properly sealed to protect against rain and moisture. Figure 2-2: Bottom Panel of the Outdoor Unit (without the seal assembly) NOTE The MAC Address of the unit is marked on both the ODU and the indoor unit (on the print side of the BS-AU module or on the bottom side of the Universal IDU). If for any reason the ODU is not used with the IDU with which it was shipped, the MAC Address of the system is in accordance with the marking on the ODU. Installation 29
Chapter 2 - Installation 2.3.3 Connecting the Indoor-to-Outdoor Cable 2.3.3.1 Units with an Installed Waterproof Seal To connect the indoor-to-outdoor cable: 1 Remove the two screws holding the waterproof seal to the outdoor unit and remove the waterproof seal. 2 Unscrew the top nut from the waterproof seal. Figure 2-3: The Waterproof Seal 3 Route a straight Category 5E Ethernet cable (8-wire, 24 AWG) through both the top nut and the waterproof seal. NOTE Use only Category 5E 4x2x24# FTP outdoor cables from an approved manufacturer. See list of approved cables and length limitations in section 2.1.2. 4 Insert and crimp the RJ-45 connector. Refer to Appendix C for instructions on preparing the cable. 5 Connect the Ethernet cable to the outdoor unit RJ-45 connector. 6 Replace the waterproof seal and then the top nut. Make sure that the external tee a good seal. jack of the cable is well inside the waterproof seal to guaran7 Route the cable to the location selected for the indoor equipment. 8 Assemble an RJ-45 connector with a protective cover on the indoor end of the indoor-to-outdoor cable. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 30
Installing the Outdoor Unit 2.3.3.2 Units with a Waterproof Seal Supplied with the Ethernet Cable To connect the indoor-to-outdoor cable: 1 Verify that the o-ring supplied with the cable kit is in place. 2 Connect the RJ-45 connector of the Ethernet cable to the outdoor unit. 3 Attach the waterproof seal to the unit. Tighten the top nut. 4 Route the cable to the location selected for the indoor equipment. 5 Assemble an RJ-45 connector with a protective cover on the indoor end of the indoor-to-outdoor cable. See Appendix C for instructions on preparing the cable. Installation 31
Chapter 2 - Installation 2.4 Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit used to facilitate n in the following figure: The unit can be placed on a desktop or a shelf. Alternatively, it may be wall-mounted. The drilling template included with the unit can bethe wall installation process. The equipment is shipped with a PS1073 IDU, show Figure 2-4: IDU PS 1073 Front Panel The RADIO connector and RESET button are located on the front panel, the ETHERNET connector is located on the side panel and LEDs are located on the top panel. CAUTION Do not connect the data equipment to the RADIO port. The RADIO port supplies DC power to the ODU, and this may harm other equipment connected to it. To install the IDU: 1 Connect the Indoor-to-Outdoor cable to the RADIO connector, located on the front panel of the indoor unit. 2 Connect the power cord to the unit's AC socket, located on the rear panel. Connect the other end of the power cord to the AC mains. The unit can operate with AC mains of 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz. NOTE The color codes of the power cable are as follows: Brown Phase ~ Blue Neutral 0 Yellow/Green Ground 3 Verify that the POWER LED is lit, indicating that power is supplied to the unit. 4 Configure the basic parameters as described in section 3.1. 5 Connect the 10/100 BaseT ETHERNET connector to the network. The cable connection should be a straight Ethernet if connecting the indoor unit to a BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 32
Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit hub/switch and a crossed cable if connecting it directly to a PC NetwInterface Card (NIC). ork NOTE The length of the Ethernet cable connecting the indoor unit to the user's equipment, together with the length of the Indoor-to-Outdoor cable, should not exceed 100 meters. 2.4.1 p object, press the recessed RESET button for a short time to reset The RESET button can also be used for setting the unit to its factory defaults. ops blinking): the unit will reboot with the factory default configuration. RESET Button Functionality Using a sharthe unit and reboot from the Main version. Press the button for at least 5 seconds (until the ETH LED of the IDU stNOTE Reset the ODU using the RESET button on the IDU after connecting or reconnecting the indoor and outdoor units with the indoor-to-outdoor cable. Installation 33
Chapter 2 - Installation 2.5 Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment The following sections describe the slot assignment for the Base Station chassis, provide illustrated descriptions of the power supply modules and Access Unit network interface modules, and describe how to install the Base Station equipment. 2.5.1 BS-SH Slot Assignment The Base Station chassis comprises ten slots, as shown in Figure 2-5. Figure 2-5: BS-SH Chassis Slot Assignment To enable power supply redundancy, two BS-PS power supply modules can be ed i ide slots. If a single power supply module is used, it can be inserted into either one of the two available slots. The remaining eight slots can hold up to six BS-AU modules. Unused slots should remsign s Units with longing to BreezeACCESS VL family or other rts any mixture of CESS GFSK BS-AU 00 s and one BS-PS GFSK (AC or DC) for the BreezeACCESS GFSK install n the wider sain covered until required. The de of the BS-SH supports collocation of BreezeACCESS 4900 Acces Access Units beBreezeACCESS families using GFSK modulation. It suppoBS-AU 4900 modules with BreezeACCESS VL or BreezeACmodules, including an optional BS-GU-GPS module. If Access Units belonging to BreezeACCESS GFSK families are used, then it is necessary to use two power supply modules: one BS-PS (AC or DC) power supply for the BreezeACCESS 49Access Unit BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 34
Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment Access Units. The es can be used to power also 2.5.2 Module ides power to all the BS-AU modul assis. Figure 2-6 shows the BS-PS-AC front same BS-PS power supply modulBreezeACCESS VL BS-AU modules. BS-PS-AC Power Supply The BS-PS-AC is an AC to DC converter that proves installed in the BS-SH chpanel. Figure 2-6: BS-PS-AC Front Panel The BS-PS-AC includes a power input connector, marked AC IN, for connecting the AC power cord to the mains. The ON/OFF Power Switch controls the flow of mains power to the power supply module. Installation 35
Chapter 2 - Installation Table 2-2: BS-PS LED Functionality Name Description 54V es that the 54V power supply module is OK Green LED. Indicat3.3V Green LED. Indicates that the 3.3V power supply module is OK OVER Red LED. Indicates an over temperature condition in the power supply TEMP module 2.5.3 BS-PS-DC Power Supply Module The BS-PS-DC is a DC-to-DC converter that provides power to all the BS-AUmodules installed in the BS-SH chassis. Figure 2-7 shows the BS-PS-DC frontpanel. Figure 2-7: BS-PS-DC Front Panel Th BS-PS-DC provides a power input connector, marked -48VDC, for connect -48 VDC power soue ing the rce to the module. e Black (pin 2): 48 VDC Th color codes of the cable wires are as follows: BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 36
Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment   The N ower to the power supply modulee2.5.4 BFig ss Unit Network Interface module. Red (pin 1): + (Return) Shield (pin 3) O /OFF Power Switch controls the flow of mains p. Th functionality of the LEDs is described in Table 2-2. S-AU Network Interface Module ure 2-8 shows the front panel of the BS-AU Acce Figure 2-8: BS-AU Front Panel The BS-AU provides the following interfaces:  10/100 BaseT: A 10/100BaseT Ethernet connector for connecting the BS-AU to the network. A straight Ethernet cable should be used to connect the module to a hub, router or switch.  RADIO: A 10/100BaseT Ethernet connector for connecting the BS-AU to an AU-ODU outdoor unit. Installation 37
Chapter 2 - Installation CAUTION Do not connect the data equipment to the RADIO port. The RADIO port supplies DC power to the ODU, and this may harm other equipment connected to it. The recessed RESET switch on the front panel is for resetting the outdoor unit. 2.5.5 Installing the BS-SH Chassis and Modules This section describes how to install the power supply and Access Unit network interface modules in the Base Station chassis. To install the BS SH chassis and modules: 1 Install the BS-SH chassis in a 19” cabinet. To prevent over-heating, leave a free space of at least 1U between the upper/lower covers of the BS-SH chassis and other units in the cabinet. OR Place the BS-SH chassis on an appropriate shelf or table. When mounting the BS-SH on a shelf or table, attach the rubber legs supplied with the unit. 2 Connect one end of a grounding cable to the ground terminal located on the rear panel of the BS-SH chassis and firmly tighten the grounding screw. 3 Connect the opposite end of the grounding cable to a ground connection or to the cabinet, if applicable. 4 Carefully insert the BS-PS power supply and the BS-AU modules into the relevant slots and push firmly until they are securely locked. Before insertion, verify that the switches of all BS-PS modules are in the OFF position. Refer to section 2.5.1 for a description of the slot assignment. 5 Close the captive screws attached to each module. 6 Place blank covers over all of the unused slots. 7 Connect the indoor-to outdoor cable(s) to the RADIO connector(s) of the BS-AU module(s). 8 If a BS-PS-DC power supply is used, connect the DC power cord to the -48 VDC IN jack of the BS-PS-DC power supply. If a redundant power supply module is installed, connect a DC power cord also to the second DC power module. Connect the power cord(s) to the -48 VDC power source, as follows: a Connect the black wire to the 48 VDC contact of the power source. b Connect the red wire to the + (Return) contact. c Connect the shield to the ground. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 38
Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment 9 If a BS-PS-AC power supply is used, connect the AC power cord to the AC IN jack of the BS-PS-AC power supply. If a redundant power supply moinstalled, connect an AC power cord also to the second AC power moConnect the power cord(s) to the mains outlet. 10 Switch the BS-PS-AC/DC power supplies to ON. Verify that all poweindicator LEDs on the BS-PS-AC/DC front panel are ON and that thOVERTEMP alarm indicator is off. Refer to Table 2-2 for a descriptioLEDs. 11 Configure the basic parameters in all BS-AU modules as described in section 3.1dule is dule. r e n of these . r(s) to the network. The cable connecting the indoor unit to a hub/switch and a crossed cable if connecting it directly to a PC Network Interface Card (NIC). 12 Connect the 10/100 BaseT LAN connectoconnection should be straight Ethernet if NOTE  The length of each of the Ethernet cables (the cable connecting the indoor unit to the user's equipment and the Indoor-to-Outdoor cable) should not exceed 100 meters.  Reset the unit using the RESET button after connecting or reconnecting the indoor and outdoor units with the indoor-to-outdoor cable. Installation 39
33 Chapter 3 - Commissioning About This Chapter: rameters Configuring Basic Pa , page 42 ligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna A, page 45 onfiguring the Subscriber Unit’s Maximum Modulation Level C, page 46 ation Verification Oper , page 48
Chapter 3 - Commissioning 3.1 Configuring Basic Parameters After completing the installation process, as described in the preceding chapter, the basic parameters must be configured to ensure that the unit operates basic p rs have been configured, additional parameters remotely configured via the Ethernet port or the wireless link using Telnet P management, or a configuration file. 1 correctly. After the arametecan beor SNM by loading Refer to section 4. for info n on how to access the Monitor program using . c Configuration m cludes all the parameters necessary for the initial installation and operation of Subscriber and Access Units. In many tions, most of thes ld not b changed from their default values. The basic paramet ault values are listed in Table 3-1. efer to Chapter 4rmatioTelnet and how to use itThe Basi enu ininstalla e parameters shouers and their defeR for detailed information on the applicable parameters. Table 3-1: Basic Parameters Parameter Default Value Comment Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode (in Unit Control Parameters) Auto Negotiation IP Address 10.0.0.1 Subnet Mask 255.0.0.0 Default Gateway Address 0.0.0.0 DHCP Options Disable Access to DHCP AU: From Ethernet Only SU: From Wireless Only ESSID ESSID1 Sub-Band Select 1 Frequency Subset Definition (SU) A (All) The list of frequencies is in accordance with the Sub-Band. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 42
Configuring Basic Parameters Table 3-1: Basic Parameters Parameter Default Value Comment Tx Poweto 5, Tx Power for Modulation Level 6, Tx Power for n Level 7, Tx Powe parameter. r for Modulation Levels 1 Dependent on Sub-Band Tx Power cannot be higher than the applicable Maximum Tx Power Modulatior for Modulation Level 8 Maximum Tx Power for Modulation evels 1MaximuLevel 6 (SU), Maximum Tx Power for Modulation Level 7 Maximum TLevel 8 (SUn Sub-Band Max Tx Power cannot be higher than the upper L to 5 (SU), Dependent om Tx Power for Modulation limit according to the Sub-Band in use. (SU) x Power for Modulation ) Tx Power (AU) On Antenna Gaiantennaing to the antenna If set to “Not Set Yet”, n (units with external Accord) supplied with the unit and the Sub-Band. must be configured according to actual value, taking into account cable’s attenuation. ATPC Option Enable Best AU Support (SU) Disable Preferred A Best AU Support is enabled. U MAC Address (SU) 00-00-00-00-00-00 (none) Applicable only when Cell Distance Mode (AU) Automatic Maximum Cell Distance (AU) 0 (No Compensation) Maximum Modulation Level (SU) 8 Refer to section 3.3. VLAN ID-Management 65535 Authentication Algorithm Open System Commissioning 43
Chapter 3 - Commissioning Table 3-1: Basic Parameters Parameter Default Value Comment Data Encryption Option Disable Security WEP Mode Default Multicast Key (AU) Key 1 Promiscuous Authentication (AU) Disable Default Key (SU) Key 1 Key 1 to Key 4 00……0 (32 zeros, meaning no key) NO TE So e parameters are changed to their new values only after reset (refer to Appendix Em for more details). After the basic parameters are configured, the unit should be reset in order to activate the new configuration. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 44
Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna 3.2 ligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna The SNR bar display is located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit. The ten LEDs indicate the quality of the re e number of green LEDs indicating On, the higher the quality of the received signal. This section es how to align the Subscriber Unit antenna using the SNR bar display. Aceived signal. The higher thdescribNOTE Antenna alignment using the SNR bar dis y is possible only after the Subscriber Unit is plaassociated with an Access Unit. The associ ccess Unit must be operational and the basic ated ASubscriber Unit parameters must be corre y configured. Otherwise, the unit will not be able to ctlsynchronize with the Access Unit. As the R measurement is performed on received frames, its SNresults are meaningless unless the Subscri it is associated with an Access Unit. ber Un To align the Subscriber Unit antenna: antenna by pointing it in the general direction of the Base Station. at the power indicatio f the unit is On. 3 Verify that the W-LINK LED of the ODU is On, indicating that the unit is associated with an Access Unit. If the W-LINK LED is Off, check that the ESSID and Frequency parameters are correctly configured. If the SU is still not associated with the AU, increase the transmit power level to its maximum value. If the unit is still not associated with the AU, improve the quality of the link by changing the direction of the antenna or by placing the antenna at a higher or alternate location. 4 Rotate the antenna until the maximum SNR reading is achieved, where at least 1 green LED is on. If you encounter prolonged difficulty in illuminating the minimum required number of green LEDs, try to improve the reception quality by placing the antenna at a higher point or in an alternate location. 5 Ensure that the front of the antenna is always facing the Base Station. However, in certain conditions, such as when the line of site to the Base Station is hampered, better reception may be achieved using a reflected signal. In this case, the antenna is not always directed toward the Base Station. 6 Secure the unit firmly to the pole. 1 Align the2 Verify th n o NOTE In some cases, the antenna may need to be tilted to ensure that the level at which the SU receives transmissions from the AU (and vice versa) is not too high. As a rule of thumb, if the SU is located at a distance of less than 300 meters from the AU, it is recommended to up-tilt the antenna by approximately 10° to 15°. To guarantee a safety margin from the saturation level (received signal of –40 dBm at the antenna port), the SNR should not be higher than 50 dB. The orange LED of the SNR bar indicates that the SNR is higher than 50 dB. Commissioning 45
Chapter 3 - Commissioning 3.3 Configuring the Subscriber Unit’s Maximum Modulation Level or This section describes how to configure the maximum modulation level fSubscriber Units. NOTE If the unit is associated with the AU, then the final configuration of the Maximum Modulation Level parameter may be performed remotely, for example, from the site of the AU or from another site. To configure the Maximum Modulation Level: value that is lower than the maximum supported by the unit. This can decrease the number of r transmissions due to attempts to transmit at modulation levels that are too high for the actua2 Check the SNR of the SU at the AU. You can use Telnet to view the SNR values in dress D h can be accessed from the Site Survey m TPC al he test sho ne with the In Level at the SU configured to its maximum value. If the SNR d for the maximum modulation level ac ommended that you decrease the value of the 1 If the SNR of the SU at the AU is too low, it is recommended that you configure the Maximum Modulation Level parameter to a el quality of the link. the MAC Ad atabase, whicenu. If the Auld be dogorithm is not enabled in both AU and SU, titial Power is lower than the values requirecording to Table 3-2, it is rec Maximum Modulation Level. NOTE The SNR measurement at the AU is ac e curate only when receiving transmissions from thapplicable SU. If necessary, use the Ping T he Site Survey menu to verify data est utility in ttransmission. 3 Configure the Maximum Modulat 3-2, using the typical S eco added to compens ible mea ality of the link.ion Level according to Tablemmended that a 2 dB margin beNR values. It is rate for poss surement inaccuracy or variance in the qu BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 46
Configuring the Subscriber Unit’s Maximum Modulation Level Table 3-2: Recommended Maximum Modulation Level SNR Maximum Modulation Level SNR > 23 dB 8 21 dB < SNR < 23 dB 7 16 dB < SNR < 21 dB 6 13 dB < SNR < 16 dB 5 10 dB < SNR < 13 dB 4 8 dB < SNR < 10 dB 3 7 dB < SNR < 8 dB 2 6 dB < SNR < 7 dB 1 Commissioning 47
Chapter 3 - Commissioning 3.4 Operation Verification ing sections describe how t rect functioning of the nit, Indoor Unit, Ethernet c vity. 3.4.1 r Unit Verifica operation of the Outdoor Unit, examine the LED indicators l of the ouThe following tables list the provided LEDs and their associated indications. The follow o verify the corOutdoor U onnection and data connecti Outdoo tion To verify the correctlocated on the bottom pane tdoor unit. NOTE Verifying the correct operation of the Outdoor Unit using the LEDs, as described below, is only possible after the configuration and alignment ompleted. processes are c Table 3-3: AU-O DU LEDs Name Description Functionality W-LINK Wireless Link Indictor  Green – Unit is associated with one or more SUs  Blinking red – No associations  Off – Wireless link is disabled Status Self-test and power indication  Green – Power is available and self-test passed.  Blinking Amber – Testing (not ready for operation)  Red – Self-test failed – fatal error ETH Ethernet activity/ connectivity indication  Green –Ethernet link detected.  Amber – No Ethernet connectivity between the indoor and outdoor units. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 48
Operation Verification Table 3-4: SU-ODU LEDs Name Description Functionality W-LINK Wireless Link  Green – Unit is associated with an AU, Data received or transmitted on the wireless link. Blinking rate is proportional to wireless te  Off – Wireless link is disabled Indictor no wireless link activity  Blinking Green –traffic raStatus Self-test power er is available and for  and indication  Green – Powself-test passed.  Blinking Amber – Testing (not ready operation) Red – Self-test failed – fatal error ETH Ethernet activity/ connectivity indication  etween the connectivity ng  Green – Ethernet link bindoor and outdoor units is detected,no activity  Blinking Green – Ethernetis OK, with traffic on the port. Blinkirate proportional to traffic rate. Red – No Ethernet connectivity between the indoor and outdoor units. SNR BAR (SU-RA) Received signal strength Indication w e received  Red LED: Signal is too lo(SNR<4 dB)  8 green LEDs: Quality of thsignal  Orange LED: Signal is too high(SNR > 50 dB) Commissioning 49
Chapter 3 - Commissioning T able 3-5: SU-ODU SNR Bar LED FunctionalitySNR Bar LEDs SNR (typical) LED 1 (red) is On B) Signal is too low (SNR < 4 dLED 2 (green) is On SNR > 4 dB LEDs 2 to 3 (green) S are On NR > 8 dB LEDs 2 to 4 (green) S are On NR > 13 dB LEDs 2 to 5 (green) are On SNR > 19 dB LEDs 2 to 6 (green) are On SNR > 26 dB LEDs 2 to 7 (green) are On SNR > 31 dB LEDs SNR > 38 dB 2 to 8 (green) are On LEDs 2 to 9 (green) are On SNR > 44 dB LEDs 2 to 9 (green) and 10 (orange) are On Signal is too high (SNR > 50 dB) BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 50
Operation Verification 3.4.2 Indoor Unit Verification To verify the correct operation of the indoor equipment, examine the LEindicators located on the top panel of the SU IDU and AU IDU units, or front panel of the BS-AU module. Table 3-6D on the provides information for the BS-AU IDU LEDs. Table 3-7 lists of the PS1073 IDU and their associated indications. Table 3-6: BS-AU LEDs the LEDs Name Description Functionality W-LINK Wireless link activity  Blinking Red - No SU is associated.  Off - Wireless link is disabled.  Green - At least one SU is associated. ODU CURRENT CONSCurrent Consumption of  Red - over current. d - open circuit or below anticipated current consumption. Green - within tolerance. UMPTION the Outdoor Unit  Blinking ReODU STATUS Outdoor Unit Self-test  Green - Self test passed and ODU ready for operation.  Blinking Amber - Testing (not ready for operation)  Red - fatal failure. IDU PWR Power indication for the Indoor Unit  Green - IDU power is OK.  Off - no power is supplied to the IDU. ALARM Indoor Unit Alarm Indication  Red - a fatal failure indication.  Off - IDU is functioning properly. Commissioning 51
Chapter 3 - Commissioning Table 3-7: PS1073 SU IDU / AU-SA IDU LEDs Na me Description Functionality POWER Powe  Green - IDU power is OK r Indication  Off - No power or power failure ETH been detected between the outdoor unit and the device connected to the Self test and end-to-end Ethernet  Off - No Ethernet connectivity has connectivity indoor unit.  Green - Self-test passed and Ethernet connection confirmed by the outdoor unit (Ethernet integrity check passed). 3.4.3 Verifying the Ethernet Connection (Modular Base station) necting the unit to an Ethe , verify that the Ethernet Integrity ator, which is the yellow LED e ed in the 10/100 BaseT connector, is on. This indicates that the unit is connected to an Ethernet segment. The hernet Activity Indicator, which is green embedded LED, should blink whenever the unit receives or transmits traffic on the 10/100 BaseT port. .4.4 Verifying the Indoor-to-Outdoor Connection Modular Base Station) y his indicates that the unit has detected an Ethernet link connection. The Ethernet tun3.4.5 Verifying Data Connectivity To verify data connectivity, from the end-user’s PC or from a portable PC connected to the unit, ping the Access Unit, or try to connect to the Internet. After con rnet outletIndic mbeddEt the 3(After connecting the unit to an Ethernet outlet, verify that the Ethernet IntegritIndicator, which is the yellow LED embedded in the RADIO connector, is on. TAc ivity Indicator, which is the green embedded LED, should blink whenever the it receives or transmits traffic on the RADIO port. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 52
44 Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration In This Chapter:  Working with the Monitor Program, page 54  Menus and Parameters, page 57
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration 4.1 orking with the Monitor Program 4.1.1 ing Telnet it. The ed. 4 Select the required access level, depending on your specific access rights. A password entry request is displayed. Table 4-1 lists the default passwords for each of the access levels. Table 4-1: Default Passwords WAccessing the Monitor Program Us1 Connect a PC to the Ethernet port, using a crossed cable. 2 Configure the PC's IP parameters to enable connectivity with the undefault IP address is 10.0.0.1. 3 Run the Telnet program. The Select Access Level menu is displayAccess Rights Password Read-Only public Installer user Administrator private NOTE Following three unsuccessful login attempts (using incorrect passwords), the monitor program is blocked for several minutes. To enable access to the monitor program during that time, the unit must be reset via SNMP or by disconnecting/reconnecting power. 5 Enter your password and press Enter. The Main Menu is displayed as shown in Figure 4-1. The unit type, SW version number and SW release date displayed in the Main Menu vary according to the selected unit and SW version. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 54
Working with the Monitor Program BreezeACCESS 4900/AU-SA-4900 Official Release Version – 3.2.3 Release Date: June 14 2005, 17:10:21 Main Menu ========== 1 – Info Screens 2 – Unit Control 3 - Basic Configuration 4 – Site Survey 5 - Advanced Configuration x - Exit >>> Figure 4-1: Main Menu (Administrator Level) NOTE If th ow, the e Telnet session is not terminated properly; for example, if you simply close the windmon inutes. To enable access to the monitor program during itor program is blocked for several mthat P or by disconnecting/reconnecting power. time, the unit must be reset via SNMThe display of the Main Menu varies depending on the user's access level, aows. For users with read only acces foll ss rights, only the Info Screens option is displayed. Users with this access level are not able to access the Unit Control,  For users with Installer access rights, the first four menu items, Info Screens,  For users with Administrator access rights, the full Main Menu is displayed. items. 4.1.2 ases you may need to click Enter.  Click Esc to exit a menu or option. Basic Configuration, Site Survey and Advanced Configuration menus. Unit Control, Basic Configuration and Site Survey, are displayed. Users with this access level are not able to access the Advanced Configuration menu. These users can access all menuCommon Operations The following describes the standard operations used when working with the Monitor program.  Type an option number to open or activate the option. In certain cOperation and Administration 55
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration NOTE The program is automatically terminated following a determined period of inactivity. The default time out is 5 minutes and is configured with the Log Out Timer parameter. In some cases, to activateCertain settings are auto any configuration changes, you must reset the unit. matically activated without having to reset the unit. Refer to Appendix E for information on which parameters are run time configurable, which means that the unit need not be reset for the parameter to take effect, and which parameters do require that the unit be reset. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 56
Menus and Parameters 4.2 M Monitor program. 4.2.1 cess the following menus, depending on your access level, as described in section 4.1 enus and Parameters The following sections describe the menus and parameters provided by theMain Menu The Main Menu enables to ac.  Info Screens: Provides a read only display of current parameter values.  Unit Control: Enables to access general operations, such as resetting the swiAdministrator access levels.  Bas uration: Enables to access the set of parameters that are configured during the installation process. These parameters are also Adm cou aller and Administrator access levels. ess all system parameters, including the Basic Configuration parameters. Available only at the Administrator access 4.2.2 Info Screens Menu The view the current values of various parameter sets. The parameter sets are identical to the main parameter groups in or choose to view all parameters at once. While this menu is available at all access levels, some security related parameters including the encryption Keys, ESSID and Operator ESSID are only displayed to users with Administrator access rights. The Info Screens menu includes the following options:  Show Unit Status  Show Basic Configuration Available at all access levels. unit, reverting to factory default parameters, changing passwords and tching between software versions. Available at the Installer and ic Configavailable in the Advanced Configuration menu. Available at the Installer and inistrator access levels. Site Survey: Enables to activate certain tests and view various system nters. Available at the Inst Advanced Configuration: Enables to acclevel. Info Screens menu enables you to the configuration menus. You can view a specific parameter set Operation and Administration 57
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration  Show Advanced Configuration  Show Country Dependent Parameters  Show All Parameters 4.2.2.1 Show Unit Status The Show Unit Status menu is a read only menu that displays the current values of t ed in the Unit Control menu.  es the unit's function: AU-BS (a modular access unit), AU-SA (a stand-alone access unit), or SU-BD (a subscriber unit that supports a  Unit MAC Address: The unit's unique IEEE MAC address.  Current Number of Associations (AU only): The total number of SUs mber may include units that are not currently active as there is no aging algorithm for associated SUs. he following parameters: Unit Name: As definUnit Type: Identifigross CPE rate of 27 Mbps and a full LAN). associated with this AU. This nu NOTE An SU is only removed from the list of associated SUs under the following conditions:  her AU indicating that the SU is now associated with the A SNAP frame is received from anotother AU.  nsecutive frames transmitted by the AU and The SU failed to respond to a certain number of cois considered to have "aged out".  Number of Associations Since Last Reset: For SUs - displays the total s the number of SUs that have associated with the AU since the last reset, including duplicate me SU.  tus of the SU. There are two status options:  SCANNING: The SU is searching for an AU with which to associate. ed with an AU. number of associations with any AU since the last reset, including duplicate associations with the same AU. For AUs - displayassociations with the saUnit Status (SU only): The current sta ASSOCIATED: The SU is associat BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 58
Menus and Parameters  AU MAC Address (SU only): The MAC address of the AU with which the unit is currently associated. If the unit is not associated with any AU, the address ardware. . is running from the Main or from the Shadow Version.  Main Version File Name: The name of the compressed file (with a “.bz” ed as the main version. version currently defined as the main version.  Shadow Version File Name: The name of the compressed file (with a “.bz” y defined as the shadow (backup) version.  Shadow Version Number: The software version currently defined as the shadoadio Band: The radio ba it. Out Timer: The value of the Log Out Timer a efined in the Unit Control nu.  Ethernet Port Negotiatio Ethernet p on mode as n the Unit Controate: The tate of the Ethe t. defaults to the IEEE broadcast address, which is FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF.  Unit Hardware Version: The version of the outdoor unit h Unit BOOT Version: The version of the BOOT SW Time Since Last Reset  Flash Versions:  Running from: Shows whether the unitextension) of the version currently defin Main Version Number: The softwareextension) of the version currentlw (backup) version.  Rnd of the un Log s dmen Mode: The ort negotiatidefined i l menu.  Ethernet Port St actual s rnet porOperation and Administration 59
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration  FTP Parameters: General FTP parameters (common to SW Version Download, Configuration File Upload/Download and Event File Upload using FTP):  FTP Client IP Address IP Mask FTP Server IP Address FTP Gateway IP Address FTP Software Download Parameters: The parameters for SW download ng FTP, as defined in Unit Control menu. as defined in the Unit Control File Name ource Directory Name rameters: The parameters for Event Log file upload Unit Control menu. y 4.2.2.2 menu is a read only menu that displays the current values of the parameters included in the Basic Configuration menu.  FTP Client  FTP User Name  FTP Password usi FTP Source Directory  FTP SW Version File Name  Configuration File Download/Upload Parameters: The parameters for Configuration file upload/download using FTP,menu.  Configuration Configuration File S Operator Defaults File FTP Log File Upload Pausing FTP, as defined in the FTP Log File Name  FTP Log File Destination Directory  Event Log PolicShow Basic Configuration The Show Basic Configuration BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 60
Menus and Parameters 4.2.2.3 Configuration onfiguration menu enables to access the read only sub menus that display the current values of the parameters included in the s of the Advanced Configuration menu. 4.2.2.4 the parameters that are afftected by zeACCESS 4900 supports two sets of frequencies ese Sub-Bands, there is a set of parameters that eral rs include the following: : Supported. ion Support: Supported. ndent Parameters: Table 4-2: Sub-Band Dependent Parameters Show AdvancedThe Show Advanced Capplicable sub menuShow Country Dependent Parameters The Country Dependent Parameters displays applicable regulations. Bree(Sub-Bands). For each of threflects the applicable radio regulations. In addition, there are several genparameters that reflect availability of various security options. The CountryDependent Paramete Country Code: 1022 – FCC 4.9 GHz.  Data Encryption Support AES Encrypt Authentication Encryption Support: Supported. Sub-Band Depe Parameter Sub-Band 1 Sub-Band 2 Sub-Band ID 1 2 Frequencieps 5 MHz steps es 4947.5 - 4982.5 MHz, 5 MHz st4947.5 - 4982.5 MHz, Allowed Bandwidth 10 MHz 5 MHz RegulaAntenntion Max Tx Power at a Port 20 dBm 17 dBm RegulaSU: No Limit : 43 dBm SU: No Limit tion Max EIRP AU: 46 dBm AUMin Modulation Level 1 1 Max M 8 odulation Level 8 Burst M Enabled ode EnabledOperation and Administration 61
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration Table 4-2: Sub-Band Dependent Parameters Parameter Sub-Band 1 Sub-Band 2 Maximum Burst Duration 10 milliseconds 10 milliseconds DFS O upported ption Not Supported Not SMinimum HW Revision Support D D New Country Code files can be uploaded remotely using TFTP (see Appendix B). 4.2.2.5 ters menu is a enu that displays the current values of all status and configur Show All Parameters The Show All Parame read only mation parameters. NOTE The values of some security related par and ameters, including the encryption Keys, ESSIDOperator ESSID, are available only with Administrator access rights. 4.2.3 Unit Control Menu The Unit Control menu enables configurin r the unit. The Unit Control menu includes the Reset Unit  Default Settings  Change Unit Name  Change Password Flash Memory Control g control parameters fo following options:  SW Version Download  Configuration File Upload/Download  Log Out Timer  Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode  Change System Location BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 62
Menus and Parameters  Event Log Menu 4.2.3.1 Reset t ption enables reset it. After reset, any modifications made to the system parameters are4.2.3.2 Default Settings The Set defaults submenu enables meters to a predefined set of defaults or saving t tion as the set of Operator Defaults. The Default Setting options are avai with Administrator access rights. The available options are: efaults  Save Current Configuration As Op ults 4.2.3.2.1 Set Defaults The Set Defaults submenu enables r em parameters to a predefined set of defaults. There are t ult configurations: efaults: This is the sta tion. B Operator Defaults: Operator Def on can be defined by the Administrator using the Save Cu s Operator Defaults option in this menu. It may also be defined at the factory according to specific operator's definition. The defaul uration is the Factory Defaults configuration. The current configuration file and t lts configuration file can be uploaded/downloaded by the unit u re information, see section  Feature Upgrade UniThe Reset Unit o ting the un applied. resetting the system parahe current configuralable only to users  Set Derator Defaeverting the systwo sets of defaA Factory D ndard default configuraaults configuratirrent Configuration At Operator Defaults confighe Operator Defausing FTP. For mo4.2.3.7 option. These files can also b ed/downloaded remotely using TFTP (see Appendix Be upload). The available options in the Set Defaults submenu are:  Set Complete Factory Defaults  Set Partial Factory Defaults  Set Complete Operator Defaults Operation and Administration 63
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration  S t Partial Operator Defaults 4.2.3.2 te Factory Defaults Select this option to reset the unit t actory Defaults configuration, excluding several parameters that are Table 4-3: Parameters not reset after Se /Operator Defaults e Cancel Current Pending Request .1.1 Set Compleo the standard F listed in Table 4-3. t Complete FactoryParameters Group Parameter All Passwords FTP e note below) Server IP address* (seFTP low) Gateway IP address* (see note beFTP Client IP address* (see note below) FTP below) Client IP Mask* (see noteFTP User Name* (see note below) FTP Password* (see note below) Unit Control Parameters Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode Selected Sub-Band Frequency (AU) Frequency Subset (AU) Air Interface Parameters Antenna Gain (AU) NOTE The FTP parameters are not set to their default values after Set Complete Operator Defaults. However, they are set to their default value after Set Complete Factory Defaults. Note that in this case they are set to the default values immediately upon selecting the Set Complete Factory Default option (even before the next reset). 4.2.3.2.1.2 Set Partial Factory Defaults Select this option to reset the unit to the standard Factory Default configurexcluding the parameters that are required to maintain connectivity and ation, management access. The parameters that do not change after Set Partial Factory Defaults are listed in Table 4-4. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 64
Menus and Parameters Table 4-4: Parameters that are not reset after Set Partial Factory/Operator Defaults Parameters Group Parameter Passwords Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode FTP Server IP address FTP Gateway IP Address FTP Client IP address FTP Client IP Mask FTP User Name Unit CFTP Password ontrol parameters IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Address DHCP Option IP Parameters Access to DHCP Authentication Algorithm Default Key (SU) Data Encryption Mode Default Multicast Key (AU) Security Mode SecuriKey # 1 to Key # 4 ty Parameters ESSID Operator ESSID Option (AU) Operator ESSID (AU) Cell Distance Mode (AU) Maximum Cell Distance (AU) Air InterfacSelected Sub-Band e Parameters Operation and Administration 65
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration Table 4-4: Parameters that are not reset after Set Partial Factory/Operator Defaults Parameters Group Parameter Frequency (AU) Frequency Subset (SU) ATPC Option (AU) Transmit Power Tx Control (AU) Best AU Support (SU) Preferred AU MAC Address (SU) Performance Parameters Adaptive Modulation Decision Thresholds VLAN ID – Management Bridge Parameters MAC Address Deny List (AU) 4.2.3.2.1.3 Se ults Select this option to reset the unit to the Operator Defaults configuration, 4.2.3.2.1.4 SeSelect this option to reset the unit to the Operator Defaults configuration, exc at are required to maintain connectivity and management access. The parameters that do not change after Set Partial 4.2.3.2.1.5 Cancel Current Pending Request Aft lts options, it will be executed after the next reset. This option enables you to cancel the pending request before execution 4.2.3.2.2 Save CurThe tion As Operator Defaults enables defining the current configuration of the unit as the Operator Defaults configuration. t Complete Operators Defaexcluding several parameters that are listed in Table 4-3. t Partial Operator Defaults luding the parameters thOperator Defaults are listed in Table 4-4. er selecting one of the Set defau(provided the unit has not been reset yet). rent Configuration As Operator Defaults Save Current Configura BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 66
Menus and Parameters 4.2.3.3 The Change Unit Name option enables changing the name of the unit, which is als used as the prompt at the bottom of each Monitor window. Valid values: A string of up to 32 printable ASCII characters. 4.2.3.4 Change Password The sword(s). The Ch enu is available only to users with Administrator access rights. RefChange Unit Name o the system's name in the MIB2. The name of the unit is also The default unit name is an empty string. Change Password submenu enables changing the access pasange Password submValid values: A string of up to 8 printable ASCII characters. er to section 4.1 for a list of the default passwords for each of the access levels. 4.2.3.5 Flash Memory Control ash Memory Control submenu enables selecting the active software version and select the shadow version as the new active version by selecting after the next reset, the main version is re-activated. To continue using the currently active version after the w red in the unit are not changed as a result of loading new software versions unless the new version includes additional parameters or theSel Reset and Boot from Shadow Version: Activates the shadow (backup) ally. Following the next reset the unit will switch to the main version.  Use Running Version After Reset: Defines the current running version as ed following the next reset. The Flfor the unit. The flash memory can store two software versions. One version is called Main the other is called Shadow. New software versions are loaded as the shadow version. You canReset and Boot from Shadow Version. However, next reset, select Use Running Version After Reset: The previous shadoversion will be the new main version, and vice versa. The parameters configuadditional changes in the list of parameters. New parameters are loaded with ir default values. ect from the following options: software version. The unit is reset automaticthe new main version. This version will also be usOperation and Administration 67
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration 4.2.3.6 The ownload submenu enables the optional downloading of a SW Version file from a remote FTP server. The SW Version Download submenu inc Execute FTP GET SW Version: The Execute FTP GET SW Version option wnload according to the parameters defined below.  version file. tring. Valid values: A string of up to 20 printable ASCII characters. An empty string The default is VxWorks.bz.  FTP Client IP Address: The FTP Client IP Address option enables defining the The default is: 1.1.1.3  FTP Client IP Mask: The FTP Client IP Mask option enables defining the IP The default is: 255.255.255.0  FTP Server IP Address: The FTP Server IP Address option enables defining The default is: 1.1.1.4.  FTP Gateway IP Address: The FTP Gateway IP Address option enables The default is: 0.0.0.0. SW Version Download SW Version Dludes the following options: executes the SW Version FTP doFTP SW Source Dir: The FTP SW Source Dir option enables defining thesource directory of the SWValid values: A string of up to 80 printable ASCII characters. To clear the field press "." The default is an empty s FTP SW Version File Name: The FTP SW Version File Name option enables defining the name of the SW version file in the FTP server. is not allowed. IP address of the FTP client in the unit. This secondary IP address is required only to support the optional FTP process. Mask for the FTP client mask in the unit. the IP address of the FTP server that is hosting the SW Version file. defining the FTP default gateway address. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 68
Menus and Parameters  P User Name option enables defining the user name to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the SW Version file.  P Password option enables defining the password to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the SW Version file. s.  ownload Parameters and Status: Displays the current values of the SW Version Download parameters, the current SW version and FTP User Name: The FTValid values: A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters. The default is: vx FTP Password: The FTValid values: A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characterThe default is: vx Show SW Version Dthe SW versions stored in the Flash memory. NOTE There is one set of general FTP parameters (FTP Server IP Address, FTP Gateway IP Address, FTP Client IP Address, FTP Client IP Mask, FTP User Name and FTP Password). This set (or relevant parts of the set) serves the SW Download Procedure, the Configuration File Upload/Download procedure and the Event Log File Upload procedure. Changing any of these parameters in the menu for any procedure will automatically change its value in the menu for the other procedures. 4.2.3.7 load/Download submenu enables the optional d submenu includes figuration File: The Execute FTP GET/PUT ownload of a Configuration file or an rameters defined below. The t Configuration File (cfg) n File (cfg) aults File (cmr) ults File (cmr) Configuration File Upload/Download The Configuration File Upuploading or downloading of a configuration or an Operator Defaults file from a remote FTP server. The Configuration File Upload/Downloathe following options:  Execute FTP GET/PUT ConConfiguration File executes the upload/dOperator Defaults file according to the pafollowing options are available:  Execute FTP Ge Execute FTP Put Configuratio Execute FTP Get Operator Def Execute FTP Put Operator DefaOperation and Administration 69
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration  FTP Configuration File Source Dir: The FTP Configuration File Source Dir option enables defining the source directory of the configuration/Operator rintable ASCII characters. To clear the field e FTP File Name option enables defining the name of the configuration file to be up to 20 printable ASCII characters. An empty string  Operator Defaults FTP File Name: The Operator Defaults File Name option  FTP Client IP Address: The FTP Client IP Address option enables defining the ndary IP address is required only to support the optional FTP process. The default is: 1.1.1.3  FTP Client IP Mask: The FTP Client IP Mask option enables defining the IP nt mask in the unit. 55.255.0 ess: The FTP Host IP Address option enables defining the : The FTP Gateway IP Address option enables defining the FTP default gateway address. Defaults file. Valid values: A string of up to 80 ppress "." The default is an empty string.  Configuration File FTP File Name: The Configuration Filuploaded/downloaded. Valid values: A string ofis not allowed. The default is config.cfg. enables defining the name of the Operator Defaults file to be uploaded/downloaded. Valid values: A string of up to 20 printable ASCII characters. An empty string is not allowed. The default is operator.cmr. IP address of the FTP client in the unit. This secoMask for the FTP clieThe default is: 255.2 FTP Server IP AddrIP address of the FTP server that is hosting the file. The default is: 1.1.1.4  FTP Gateway IP Address BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 70
Menus and Parameters The default is: 0.0.0.0. ng the password to be e FTP server that is hosting the file.  Show Configuration File Upload/Download Parameters: Displays the  FTP User Name: The FTP User Name option enables defining the user name to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file. Valid values: A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters. The default is: vx  FTP Password: The FTP Password option enables definiused for accessing thValid values: A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters. The default is: vx current values of the Configuration File Upload/Download parameters. NOTE The Address, re is one set of general FTP parameters (FTP Server IP Address, FTP Gateway IPFTP Client IP Address, FTP Client IP Mask, FTP User Name and FTP Password). This set (or relevant parts of the set) serves the SW Download procedure, the Configuration File Upload/Download procedure and the Event Log File Upload procedure. Changing any of these para menu for any procedure will automatically change its value in the menu for the meters in theother procedures. 4.2.3.8 Log whTheThe s. 4.2.3.9 Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode The e current Ethernet port state and enables defining the negotiation mode of the Ethernet port. The ava Force 10 Mbps and Full-Duplex  Force 100 Mbps and Half-Duplex  Out Timer The Log Out Timer parameter determines the amount of inactive time following ich the unit automatically exits the Monitor program. time out duration can range from 1 to 999 minutes. default value is 5 minute Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode submenu displays thilable options are:  Force 10 Mbps and Half-Duplex Force 100 Mbps and Full-Duplex Operation and Administration 71
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration  The d gotiation (10/100 Mbps and Half/Full Duplex) 4.2.3.10 The Change System Location option enables changing the system location of the un is also displayed as a part of the Monitor menu’s header. Valid values: A string of up to 35 printable ASCII characters. 4.2.3.11 Event Log Menu ent Log Menu enables controlling the event log feature. The event log is an from the configured severity and higher are saved and may be displayed upon displayed up to the full number of current active g Policy 4.2.3.11.1 minimal severity level. All events whose everity is equal to or higher than the defined severity are logged. . Auto Negotiation (10/100 Mbps and Half/Full Duplex) efault is Auto NeChange System Location it, which is also the sys location in MIB2. The System LocationThe default system location is an empty string. The Evimportant debugging tool and a flash memory sector is dedicated for storing it. Events are classified according to their severity level: Message (lowest severity),Warning, Error or Fatal (highest severity). The severity at which events are saved in the Event Log is configurable. Events request. Log history can beevents. In the log, an event is defined as active as long as it has not been erased (a maximum of 1000 events may be stored). The Event Log may be read using TFTP, with remote file name <SNMP Read Community>.log (the default SNMP Read Community is “public”). The Event Log may also be uploaded to a remote FTP server. The Event Log Menu includes the following options:  Event Lo Display Event Log  Erase Event Log  Event Load Upload Event Log Policy The Event Log Policy determines the sValid values are: Message (MSG) Level, Warning (WRN) Level, Error (ERR) Level, Fatal (FTL) Level, Log NoneThe default selection is Warning Level severity. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 72
Menus and Parameters 4.2.3.11.2 Display Event Log nt Log option enables viewing how many events are logged and sele er of events to be displayed (up to 1000). The display of each event time (elapsed time since last reset), the severity level and a m The events are displayed in descending order, with the most 4.2.3.11.3 Erase Event Log The Erase Event Log option enables clearing the event log. 4.2.3.11.4 Event Log Upload The bmenu enables the optional uploading of the event log file to a remote FTP server. The Event Log Upload submenu includes the following : The FTP event Log Upload Execute executes the upload of the Event Log file according to the parameters defined below.  Event Log Destination Directory: The Event Log Destination Directory irectory for the Event Log File. o 80 printable ASCII characters. To clear the field press "." The default is an empty string.  Event Log File Name: The Event Log File Name option enables defining the g of up to 20 printable ASCII characters. The default is logfile.log.  FTP Server IP Address: The FTP Host IP Address option enables defining the er that is hosting the file.  FTP Gateway IP Address option enables defining the FTP default gateway address. The default is: 0.0.0.0.  FTP User Name: The FTP User Name option enables defining the user name erver that is hosting the file. The Display Evecting the numbevent includes theessage string.recent event displayed first. Event Log Upload suoptions:  FTP Event Log Upload Executeenables defining the destination dValid values: A string of up tname of the event log file to be uploaded. Valid values: A strinIP address of the FTP servThe default is: 1.1.1.4FTP Gateway IP Address: The to be used for accessing the FTP sOperation and Administration 73
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration Valid values: A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters. word option enables defining the password to be rver that is hosting the file. CII characters. g File Upload Parameters: Displays the current values of the Event Log Upload parameters. The default is: vx  FTP Password: The FTP Passused for accessing the FTP seValid values: A string of up to 18 printable ASThe default is: vx Show FTP Event Lo NOTE There is one set of gener P Server IP Address, FTP Gateway IP Address, al FTP parameters (FTFTP Client IP Address, FTP Client IP Mask, FTP User Name and FTP Password). This set (or relevant parts of the set) serves the SW Download procedure, the Configuration File Upload/Download procedure and the Event Log File Upload procedure. Changing any of these parameters in the menu for any procedure will automatically change its value in the menu for the other procedures. 4.2.3.12 Feature Upgrade ables to enter a license string for upgrading the unit to support new features and/or options. Upon selecting the Manual Feature be requested to enter the license string. Each license string is associated with a unique MAC Address and one feature/option. If the he unit’s MAC ed. If there is a match, a message notifying of the new feature/option will be displayed. The unit must be reset for the change to The license string should comprise 32 to 64 hexadecimal digits. New Feature License files can be uploaded remotely using TFTP (see Appendix BThe Feature Upgrade option enUpgrade option the user willencrypted MAC Address in the license string does not match tAddress, the string will be rejecttake effect. ). 4.2.4 guration Menu udes all parameters required for the initial installation and operation of the unit. After the unit is properly installed and l parameters can be configured either locally or remotely using Telnet or SNMP management. Basic ConfiThe Basic Configuration menu incloperational, additiona NOTE All parameters in the Basic Configuration menu are also available in the relevant sub menus of the Advanced Configuration menu. The Basic Configuration menu enables to access the following parameter sets: BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 74
Menus and Parameters 4.2.4.1.1 s IP Parameters  IP Addres Subnet Mask  Default Gateway Address  DHCP Client  DHCP Option  Access to DHCP Refer to section 4.2.6.1 for a description of these parameters. 4.2.4.1.2 ce Parameters ers (AU) ID  Sub-Band Definition  dress  Maximum Cell Distance (AU) Air Interfa ESSID  Operator ESSID Paramet Operator ESSID Option  Operator ESS Frequency Definition  Select Sub-Band (if more than one is available)  Frequency (AU) Best AU Parameters (SU)  Best AU Support  Preferred AU MAC Ad Cell Distance Parameters  Cell Distance Mode (AU) Operation and Administration 75
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration  ATPC  ATPC Option  Transmit Power parameters  Maximum Transmit Power parameters (SU)  Tx Control (AU) Antenna Gain (AU)  Refer to section 4.2.6.2 for a description of these parameters. rformance Parameters 4.2.4.1.3 Pen Level (SU)  Maximum ModulatioRefer to section 4.2.6.5 for a description of these parameters. Bridge Parameters  VLAN ID – Management  MAC Address Deny List Refer to section 4.2.6.4 4.2.4.1.4 for a description of these parameters. Security Parameters 4.2.4.1.5 U) us Authentication (AU)  Authentication Algorithm  Data Encryption Option  Security Mode  Default Multicast Key (AU)  Default Key (S Key 1 to Key 4  Promiscuo BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 76
Menus and Parameters Some or all of the security parameters may not be available in units that do not support the applicable features. Refer to section 4.2.6.7 for a description of these 4.2.5 Site Survey Menu Theverdetand ide ential problems. In the AU, there is also an extensive database for all SUs served by it. The S ludes the following options:   Ping T   4.2.5.1 Traffic The traffic statistics are used to monitor, interpret and analyze the performance link opt Display Counters: Select this option to display the current value of the  Reset Counters: Select this option to reset the counters. 4.2.5.1.1 EtThe mes to i frame should be transmitted to the wireless medium. Frames discarded by the unit's hardware parameters. Site Survey menu displays the results of various tests and counters for ifying the quality of the wireless link. These tests can be used to help ermine where to position the units for optimal coverage, antenna alignment troubleshooting. The counters can serve for evaluating performance andntifying potite Survey menu incTraffic Statistics est  Continuous Link Quality display (SU only) MAC Address Database Per Modulation Level Counters Link Capability Statistics of the wired and wireless links. The counters display statistics relating to wireless and Ethernet frames. The Traffic Statistics menu includes the followingions: Ethernet and wireless link (WLAN) counters. hernet Counters unit receives Ethernet frames from its Ethernet port and forwards the frats internal bridge, which determines whether eachfilter are not counted by the Ethernet counters. The maximum length of a regular Operation and Administration 77
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration IEEbyt e is 1522 bytes. The he EthernmanagThe Ethernet Counters include the following statistics:  Tot ed from cludes both invalid frames (with errors) and valid frames (without errors).  Tra y the un ernet port. These are generally frames received from the wireless side, but also include frames generated by the unit itself. 4.2.5.1.2 WLThe l bri management frames. After a unicast data frame is transmitted, the unit waits for an acknowledgement (ACK) as ack CK is not received after a predefined time, which is determined by the Maximum Cell distance parameter, the unit retransmits the retdet y the Number of HW Retries parameter, the frame is dropped. Each packet to be transmitted to the wireless link is transferred to one of three que igh queue have the highest priority for transmission, and those in the Low queue have the lowest priority. Theemptie s in the Medium queue will be sent. Finally, when both the High and Medium queues are empty, the packets in the Low queue will be sent. Data p e selecte hem before the MIR/CIR mechanism (for more information see section 4.2.6.6.3 E 802.1 Ethernet frame that can be accepted from the Ethernet port is 1518 es. For tagged IEEE 802.1Q frames the maximum siz unit transmits valid data frames received from the wireless medium to tet port, as well as internally generated frames, such as responses to ement queries and pings received via the Ethernet port. al received frames via Ethernet: The total number of frames receiv the Ethernet port. This counter innsmitted wireless to Ethernet: The number of frames transmitted bit to the EthAN Counters unit submits data frames received from the Ethernet port to the internadge, as well as self generated control and wirelessmessage from the receiving unit. Some control and wireless management frames, well as broadcast and multicast frames sent to more than one unit, are not nowledged. If an Aframe until an ACK is received. If an ACK is not received before the number of ransmissions has reached a maximum predefined number, which is ermined bues: Low, Medium and High. Packets in the H packets in the High queue will be transmitted first. When this queue is d, the packetackets are routed to either the High or Low queue, according to the queud for t). BroControl and wireless management frames generated in the unit are routed to the AnBre ded adcasts/multicasts are routed to the Medium queue (applicable only for AU). High queue. y frame coming from the Ethernet port, which is meant to reach another ezeACCESS 4900 unit via the wireless port (as opposed to messages inten BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 78
Menus and Parameters for reg iguration.  reless: The number of frames transmitted to es (excluding ions, excluding Beacons in AU) nsmitted to the wireless medium, excluding retransmissions. This count is useful for calculating the rates of retransmissions or dropped  Total submitted frames (bridge): The total number of data frames submitted re are also separate counts for each priority queue through which the frames were routed (High, Mid and Low).  umber of dropped frames, which are unsuccessfully retransmitted without being acknowledged until the d  Total retransmitted frames: The total number of retransmissions, including catenated 5.10 stations behind other BreezeACCESS 4900 units), is sent to the High queue, ardless of the priority confThe Wireless Link Counters include the following statistics: Total transmitted frames to withe wireless medium. The total includes one count for each successfully transmitted unicast frame (excluding retransmissions), and the number of transmitted multicast and broadcast frames, including control and wireless management frames. In the AU, there are also separate counters for the following:  Beacons (AU only)  Management and Other Data frames, including successfully transmitted unicast frames and multicast/broadcast data framretransmiss Total Transmitted Unicasts (AU only): The number of unicast frames successfully traframes, as only unicast frames are retransmitted if not acknowledged. to the internal bridge for transmission to the wireless medium. The count does not include control and wireless management frames, or retransmissions. TheFrames dropped (too many retries): The nmaximum permitted number of retransmissions. This count includes droppedata frames as well as dropped control and wireless management frames. all unsuccessful transmissions and retransmissions.  Total transmitted concatenated frames: The total number of conframes transmitted successfully to the wireless medium, excluding retransmissions. There are also separate counts for concatenated frames thatinclude one frame (Single), two frames (Double) or more than two frames (More). For more details refer to section 4.2.6. . smission  Total Tx events: The total number of transmit events. Typically, tranevents include cases where transmission of a frame was delayed or was Operation and Administration 79
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration aborted before completion. The following additional counters are displayed toindicate the reason for and the nature of the event: f dropped frames, which are unsuccessfully retransmitted without being acknowledged until the maximum permitted derrun: The number of times that transmission of a frame was aborted for transmission exceeds the available transmission capability. er than those represented by the other of frames received from rames r of frames that were not received properly. or the  CRC: The number of frames received from the wireless medium containing CRC errors. ve rate exceeded the processing capability or the capacity of the Ethernet that were not received properly due to a ames: The total number of concatenated frames received from the wireless medium, including duplicate frames. There catenated frames that include one frame  Dropped: The number onumber of retransmissions.  Unbecause the rate of submitting frames  Others: The number of frames whose transmission was not completed or delayed due to a problem othcounters.  Total received frames from wireless: The total number from the wireless medium. The count includes data frames as well as control and wireless management frames. The count does not include bad frames and duplicate frames. For a description of these frames, refer to Bad frames received and Duplicate frames discarded below.  Total received data frames: The total number of data frames receivedthe wireless medium, including duplicate frames. Refer to Duplicate fdiscarded below.  Total Rx events: The total numbeThe following additional counters are displayed to indicate the reason ffailure:  Phy: The number of unidentified signals.  Overrun: The number of frames that were discarded because the receiport.  Decrypt: The number of framesproblem in the data decryption mechanism.  Total received concatenated frare also separate counts for con BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 80
Menus and Parameters (Single), two frames (Double) or more than two frames (More). For more details refer to section 4.2.6.5.10 .  Bad fragments received: The number of fragments received from the wiremedium containing CRC errors. less because in all counters that include data frames, only the first copy is forwarded to the Ethernet port.  discarded MIR\CIR: The number of data frames received from the Ethe re discarded by the MIR/CIR mechanism to avoid 4.2.5.2 PinThe Pin he unit and includes the following options:  Depin ess is 192.0.0.1.  mpts per session. The available range is from 0 to 9999. The default value is 1. Select 0 for  Pin1472 Ping Fr (in ms) be ts. The available range is from 100 to 60,000 ms. The Start Sendi nding option can be used to end the test before completing the specified number of  Sh ues of the ping test parameters, the transmission status, which means whether it is currently  Duplicate frames discarded: The number of data frames discardedmultiple copies were received. If an acknowledgement message is not received by the originating unit, the same data frame can be received more than once. Although duplicate frames are included Internallyrnet port that weexceeding the maximum permitted information rate. g Test g Test submenu is used to control pinging from tstination IP Address: The destination IP address of the device being ged. The default IP addrNumber of Pings to Send: The number of ping attecontinuous pinging. g Frame Length: The ping packet size. The available range is from 60 to bytes. The default value is 64 bytes. ame Timeout: The ping frame timeout, which is the amount of timetween ping attemp default value is 200 ms. ng: Starts the transmission of ping frames. Stop Sending: Stops the transmission of ping frames. The test is automatically ended when the number of pings has reached the value specified in the No. of Pings parameter, described above. The Stop Sepings, or if continuous pinging is selected. ow Ping Test Values: Displays the current valOperation and Administration 81
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration sending or not sending pings, the number of pings sent, and the number of gs received, which means the number of acknowledged frames. 4.2.5.3 Th ality submenu enables viewing continuously updated information on opt4.2.5.3.1 Continuous Average SNR Display The CoinformNoise Ratio (SNR) measurements. Click t4.2.5.3.2 ContThe Co isplays continuously updated information regarding the average quality of the wireless link to the AU, using the dynamically updated average modulation level measurements. The Link Quality Indicator (LQI) calculation is performed using the formula: LQI = (0.9 x ”Previous LQI”) + (0.1 x ”Last Successful Modulation Level”). Each successful transmit will be included in this average, by using the modulation level in which the frame was successfully transmitted as the “Last Successful Modulation Level”. In order to receive quick and reliable LQI measurements, there should be sufficient traffic between the SU and the AU. It is recommended to have traffic of at least 100 packets per second. The traffic can be generated either by an external utility (FTP session, ping generator, etc.) or by the Ping Test option in the Site Survey menu with the appropriate settings (see section 4.2.5.2 pinLink Quality (SU only) e Link Quthe quality of the wireless link. The Link quality submenu includes the followingions: ntinuous Average SNR Display option displays continuously updated ation regarding the average quality of the received signal, using Signal to he Esc key to abort the test. inuous UpLink Quality Indicator Display ntinuous UpLink Quality Indicator Display option d). NOTE If Limited Test is indicated next to the LQI results, it means that the results may not indicate the true quality, as not all modulation levels from 1 to 8 are available. The limitation may be due to the configurable Maximum Modulation Level parameter. Click the Esc key to abort the test. 4.2.5.4 MAC Address Database The MAC Address Database submenu includes the following options:  MAC Address Database in AU  MAC Address Database in SU BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 82
Menus and Parameters 4.2.5.4.1 AC Address Database in AU AC Address Database option in the AU displays information regarding the stations rwarding Database. For stations behind an SU, the SU's MAC address is also displayed (SU Address). Each MAC address entry is followed by a description, which may include the  Et (Ethernet): An address learned from the Ethernet port.  : An address of a node behind an associated SU. For these addresses, learned from the wireless port, the address of the  associated SU. For these entries, the following details are also displayed: SU Unit Name, SU SW version, SU Unit Type and SU’s s U.  X: An SU that is included in the Deny List.  The MAC address of the AU, which appears twice as it is learned from both the Ethernet and wireless ports.  stack, which also appears twice.  Alvarion's Multicast 1-20-D hich also appears . The system treats this address as a Broadcast address. t Broadc s (FF- F-FF-FF-FF). summary table displays information about the Forwarding dging Info) and the Associated Subscriber Units Database nfo). Each da udes number of r Brid includes the Et and the Vp (Virtual ports) entries. For Association Info this is the number of the currently associated SUs. MThe MSubscriber Units associated with the AU, as well as bridging (forwarding) information. The following options are available:  Display Bridging and Association Info: The Display Bridging and Association Info option displays a list of all the Subscriber Units andin the AU's Fofollowing: Vp (Virtual port)applicable SU is also displayed (in parenthesis). St (Static): An Di tance from the ASp (Special): 7 addresses that are always present, including: The MAC address of the internal Operating Systemaddress (0 6-00-00-01, wtwice The Etherne ast addres FF-FIn addition, a Database (Bri(Association I tabase incl the following information:  The current entries. Fo ging Info this (Ethernet) Operation and Administration 83
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration NOTE There is no aging algorithm for associated SUs. An SU is only removed from the list of associated SUs under the following conditions:  A SNAP frame is received from another AU indicating that the SU is now associated with the other AU.  The SU failed to respond to 50 consecutive frames transmitted by the AU and is considered to have "aged out".  The aging time specified for e s in th The aging time for Bridging Info is as spec Bridge Aging Time parameter. The default is 300 seconds. There is no aging time for Association Info entries.  The maximum number of entries permitted for these tables, which are ber of special Sp addresses as defined above) for Bridging Info and as specified by the Maximum Number of ion Info. The default value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter is 512. ntrie ese tables. ified by the1017 (1024 minus the numAssociations parameter for Associat BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 84
Menus and Parameters NOTE Whe r of associations is limited to 124. n Data Encryption is enabled, the actual maximum numbeThe Number of Associations parameter, displayed number is the value configured for the Maximumwhich might be higher than the actual limit.  Display Association Info: Displays information regarding the Subscriber info Age in seconds, indicating the elapsed time since receiving the last packet e re three options: The various status states are described below (this is a simplified Table 4-5: Authentication and Association Process Units associated with the AU. Each list entry includes the following rmation:  The MAC Address of the associated Subscriber Unit from the Subscriber Unit.  The value configured for the Maximum Modulation Level parameter of thSubscriber Unit  The Status of the Subscriber Unit. There a1 Associated 2 Authenticated 3 Not Authenticated (a temporary status) description of the association process without the effects of the Best AU algorithm). Message Direction Status in AU SU Status: Scanning A Beacon with correct ESSID AU → SU - SU Status: Synchronized Authentication Request SU → AU Not authenticated Authentication Successful AU → SU Authenticated SU Status: Authenticated Association Request SU → AU Authenticated Operation and Administration 85
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration Table 4-5: Authentication and Association Process Message Direction Status in AU Association Successful AU → SU Associated SU Status: Associated ACK SU → AU Associated Data Traffic SU ↔ AU Associated  The SNR measured at the SU  The SW version of the SU. In addition, a summary table displays information about the Forwarding  The Unit Name of the SU.  The Unit Type of the SU.  Distance. Database (Bridging Info). The database includes the following information:  The current number of entries. This is the number of currently associated SUs. NOTE There is no aging algorithm for associated SUs. An SU is only removed from the list of associated SUs under the following conditions:  A SNAP frame is received from another AU indicating that the SU is now associated with the other AU.  The SU failed to respond to 50 consecutive frames transmitted by the AU and is considered to have "aged out".  The aging time specified for entries in these table. There is no aging timefor Association Info entries. ble, which is ximum Number of Associations parameter. The Maximum Number of Associations parameter is 512.  The maximum number of entries permitted for this taspecified by the Madefault value of the BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 86
Menus and Parameters  Show MIR/CIR Database: Displays information on the MIR/CIR suassociated Subscriber Units. pport for ameters configured in the applicable SU r the uplink (SU to AU). meter. ber Unit he ed by it, the identity (MAC Address) of the wireless device to which they are connected. 4.2.5.4.2 MA Database in SU Theavaila include the An address learned from the Ethernet port. ode behind the associated AU, learned via the wireless port.  Sp (Special): 8 addresses that are always present, including:  The MAC address of the SU, which appears twice as it is learned from ternal Operating System stack, which also Each entry includes the following information:  The MAC address of the associated Subscriber Unit  The values of the MIR and CIR parfor the downlink (AU to SU) and fo The value configured in the applicable SU for the Maximum Delay para The maximum data rate of the Subscri Display MAC Pinpoint Table: The MAC Pinpoint table provides for each of the Ethernet stations (identified by the MAC Address) connected to either tAU or to any of the SUs servC Address MAC Address Database option in the SU displays information regarding the Subscriber Units bridging (forwarding) information. The following option is ble:  Display Bridging Info: The Display Bridging Info option displays a list of all the stations in the SU's Forwarding Database. Each MAC address entry is followed by a description, which mayfollowing:  Et (Ethernet):  Wl (Wireless): An address of a nboth the Ethernet and wireless ports.  The MAC address if the inappears twice. Operation and Administration 87
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration  Alvarion's Multicast address (01-20-D6-00-00-01), which also appears twice. The system treats this address as a Broadcast address. -FF-FF-FF). In addition, a summary table displays information about the Forwarding rent number of entries, the aging time specified by the Bridge Aging Time parameter and the le, which is 1016.  Display Counters: Select this option to display the current values of the Per ulation Level t categories since the last reset. For SUs, the Per Modulation Level Counters display the following information for vel supported by the unit: ber of successfully transmitted unicasts at the applicable modulation level.  FAILED: The total number of failures to successfully transmit unicast frame ycle at the applicable modulation level. ulation Level (AML) is also displayed. This is the average modulation level (rounded to the nearest integer) since the last time the nters were reset. The average is calculated using the SUCCESS count at each modulation level as weights. nd FAILED counts are provided for each of the associated SUs, which are identified by their MAC address. 4.2.5.6 Link Capability The Link Capability option provides information on HW and SW capabilities of relevant units. In an AU, the information provided in the Link Capability reports  Alvarion's special Multicast address (01-20-D6-00-00-05), reserved for future use.  The Ethernet Broadcast address (FF-FF-FFDatabase (Bridging Info). The summary table includes the curmaximum number of entries permitted for this tab4.2.5.5 Per Modulation Level Counters The Per Modulation Level Counters display statistics relating to wireless link performance at different radio modulation levels. The Per Modulation Level Counters menu includes the following options: Modulation Level Counters.  Reset Counters: Select this option to reset the Per ModCounters. The statistics show the number of frames accumulated in differeneach modulation le SUCCESS: The total numduring a HW Retry cIn addition, the Average ModPer Modulation Level couFor AUs, the SUCCESS a BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 88
Menus and Parameters is for all associated SUs. In an SU, the Link Capability reports include information on all AUs in the neighboring AUs table (all AUs with whom the SU The Link Capability feature enables to adapt the configuration of the unit sure optimal operation. ility submenu includes the following options: 4.2.5.6.1 Show Link Capability-General Select this option to view information on general parameters of relevant units. For y its MAC address, the following details are displayed:  HwVer: the hardware version of the unit.  CpldVer: The version of the Complex Programmable Logic Device (CPLD) used ying the CPLD r 4 digits country code supported by the unit. Currently this  SwVer: The SW version used by the unit. This parameter is available only in n in the relevant AU. unit. This parameter is available only in 4.2.5.6.2 view information on current wireless link parameters of ach relevant unit, identified by its MAC address, the following ation Option: Enable or Disable. : Enable or Disable. n Option: Enable or Disable. nt AU. can communicate). according to the capabilities of other relevant unit(s) to enThe Link Capabeach relevant unit, identified bin the unit. This parameter is available only in AUs, displaversion in the relevant SU.  Country: The 3 ovalue is 1022. SUs, displaying the SW versio BootVer: The Boot Version of theAUs, displaying the Boot version in the relevant SU. Show Link Capability-Wireless Link Configuration Select this option torelevant units. For edetails are displayed:  ATPC Option: Enable or Disable.  Adaptive Modul Burst Mode Option Concatenatio Country Code Learning by SU: Enable or Disable. This parameter is available only in SUs, displaying the current option in the relevaOperation and Administration 89
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration 4.2.5.6.3 Select this option to view information on current security related parameters of det   Data Encryption Option: Enable or Disable. 4.2.5.6.4 ShSelCon s). 4.2.5.6.5 ShSel iew all capabilities information (General, Wireless Link Config uration) of a selected SU (by its MAC address). Menu g nced Configuration menu enables accessing the following menus:   ers  Show Link Capability-Security Configuration relevant units. For each relevant unit, identified by its MAC address, the following ails are displayed: Security Mode: WEP, AES/OCB or AES/CCM. Authentication Algorithm: Shared Key or Open System. ow Link Capability by AU (SU only) ect this option to view all capabilities information (General, wireless Link figuration, Security Configuration) of a selected AU (by its MAC addresow Link Capability by SU (AU only) ect this option to vuration, Security Config4.2.6 Advanced Configuration The Advanced Configuration menu provides access to all parameters, includinthe parameters available through the Basic Configuration menu. The AdvaIP Parameters Air Interface ParametNetwork Management Parameters  Bridge Parameters  Performance Parameters  Service Parameters  Security Parameters BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 90
Menus and Parameters 4.2.6.1 IP Parameters The IP Parameters menu enables defining IP parameters for the selected undetermining its method of IP parameter acquisition. The IP Parameters menu includes the following options:  IP Address  Subnet Mask  Default Gateway Address  DHCP Client IP Address it and 4.2.6.1.1 ress parameter defines the IP address of the unit. 4.2.6.1.2 efines the subnet mask for the IP address of the nit. 4.2.6.1.3 Default Gateway Address fines the IP address of the unit's fault gateway address is 0.0.0.0. 4.2.6.1.4 parameters that define the method of IP . ubmenu includes the following options:  Access to DHCP 4.2.6.1.4.1 DHCP Option t status of the DHCP support, and allows selecting a new operation mode. Select from the following options: The IP AddThe default IP address is 10.0.0.1. Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask parameter duThe default mask is 255.0.0.0.The Default Gateway Address parameter dedefault gateway. The default value for the deDHCP Client The DHCP Client submenu includesparameters acquisitionThe DHCP Client s DHCP Option The DHCP Option displays the currenOperation and Administration 91
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration  Select Disable to configure the IP parameters manually. If this option is eters as described above. t(s) through which the unit searches for and selected, configure the static IP param Select DHCP Only to cause the unit to search for and acquire its IP parameters, including the IP address, subnet mask and default gateway, froma DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server only. If this option is selected, you must select the porcommunicates with the DHCP server, as described in section 4.2.6.1.4.2 . You donot have to configure static IP parameters for the unit. DHCP messages are handled by the units as management frames.  Select Automatic to cause the unit to search for a DHCP server and acquire its IP parameters from the server. If a DCHP server is not located within approximately 40 seconds, the currently configured parameters are used. If .6.1.4.2 this option is selected, you must configure the static IP parameters as described above. In addition, you must select the port(s) through which the unit searches for and communicates with the DHCP server, as described in section 4.2 . The default is Disable. municates with a DHCP server. Select from the following options:  From Ethernet Only Ethernet and Wireless Link Subscriber 4.2.6.1.5 lues of the IP parameters, ss, Run Time Subnet Mask and Run Time Default Gateway Address. 4.2.6.2 4.2.6.1.4.2 Access to DHCP The Access to DHCP option enables defining the port through which the unit searches for and com From Wireless Link Only  From BothThe default for Access Units is From Ethernet Only. The default for Units is From Wireless Link Only. Show IP Parameters The Show IP Parameters option displays the current vaincluding the Run Time IP AddreAir Interface Parameters The Air Interface Parameters menu enables viewing the current Air Interface parameters defined for the unit and configuring new values for each of the relevant parameters. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 92
Menus and Parameters 4.2.6.2.1 sed to identify a wireless network and to prevent the unintentional merging of two wireless networks or two To of SUs to an existing network without a prior knowledge of which specific AU will serve it, and to support the Best AU feature, AU r ESSID Option is enabled at the AU, the Beacon frames transmitted by it will include both the ESSID and Operator ESSID. The SU shall ES the AU with which the SU is eventually associated is defined as the Run-Time ESSID of the SU. Typically, the initial ESSID of the SU ass ESSID can be reconfigured to the value of the ESSID of the AU. 4.2.6.2.1.1 The ESSID Parameters The ESSID (Extended Service Set ID) is a string usectors in the same network. Typically, a different ESSID is defined for each AU. facilitate easy additiona secondary "global" ESSID, namely "Operator ESSID", can be configured in the. If the Operatoregard such frames if either the ESSID or the Operator ESSID matches it own SID. The ESSID of is configured to the value of the Operator ESSID. When the SU has become ociated with a specific AU, its ESSID ESSID parameter defines the ESSID of the unit. Valid values: A string of up to 31 printable ASCII characters. The default value is ESSID1. NOTE The ESSID string is case sensitive. 4.2.6.2.1.2 Operator ESSID Parameters (AU only) 4.2.6.2.1.2.1 Operator ESSID Option bles or disables the use of Operator ESSID for The default is Enable. parameter defines the Operator ESSID. The Operator ESSID Parameters submenu includes the following parameters: The Operator ESSID Option enaestablishing association with SUs. 4.2.6.2.1.2.2 Operator ESSID The Operator ESSID Valid values: A string of up to 31 printable ASCII characters. The default value is ESSID1. NOTE The Operator ESSID string is case sensitive. Operation and Administration 93
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration 4.2.6.2.2 Frequency Definition Parameters 4.2.6.2.2.1 et ature is enabled, the SU will scan the defined l cle. configured Sub-Bands, according to the ters include also the frequencies that can be 4.2.6.2.3 in AU 4.2.6.2.3.1 Sub-Bands and Frequency Selection The parameters that determine the frequency to be used are set in the AU. The SU should be configured with a minimal set of parameters to ensure that it will be able to automatically detect and use the frequency used by the AU, including possible changes in this frequency. To simplify the installation process the SU scans a definable frequencies subsafter power-up. If the Best AU fesubset and the operating frequency will be determined by the Best AU mechanism (including the optional use of the Preferred AU feature). Otherwise the SU will try to associate with the first AU it finds. If no AU is found, the SU wilstart another scanning cyEach unit is delivered with two pre-country code. These sets of parameused and the bandwidth. The sub-band to be used can be selected in both the AU and the SU. Frequency Definition SubmenuThe Frequency Definition submenu in AU includes the following parameters: Sub-Band Select For information on how to view the Sub-Bands supported by the unit and the supported parameters’ values and options, refer to section 4.2.2.4 . The available options are 1 and 2. The default selection is Sub-Band 1. Frequency The Frequency parameter defines the transmit/receive frequency. The range depends on the selected Sub-Band. 4.2.6.2.3.2 The default is the lowest frequency in the Sub-Band. In the current version, the 4.2.6.2.3.3 arning by SU ature support simplified installation and updates processes by enabling are the same. If they are not the same and the default frequency for both Sub-Bands is 4947.5 MHz. ountry Code LeCThis fethe SU to adapt the Country Code used by the AU. The AU advertises its country code in every beacon and association response message. Upon synchronization the SU will check if its country code and the country code received from the AU BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 94
Menus and Parameters Country Code Learning by SU is enabled, the SU will use the AU’s country code: rived limitations will be forced and the following parameters w country definitions: (per modulation level) will be set to the maximum defined t to the maximum modulation level defined by l be set to enable if the country code supports burst mode, and the burst duration will be set to default. learning (adaptation) the unit is automatically reset. Before this automatic reset, if the unit is running from the shadow version, the versions ing version must be set as main. This is done to the country code dewill be set according to ne Maximum TX Power by the country code.  TX Power (per modulation level) will be set to the maximum defined by thecountry code.  The Modulation Level will be sethe country code.  The Multicast Modulation Level will be set to the minimum modulation level defined by the country code.  The Burst Mode wilAfter country codemust be swapped and the runnavoid returning to the previous version, which occurs automatically after the reset. The default is Enable. NOTE The Country Code Learning by SU feature does not function with the default ESSID (ESSID1). 4.2.6.2.3.4 ing Show Frequency Definitions, the selected Sub-Band and 4.2.6.2.4 Frequency 4.2.6.2.4.1 ntry code supports two or more Sub- and Show Frequency definitions Upon selectFrequency are displayed. Definition Submenu in SU Sub-Band Select This parameter is available only if the couBands. For information on how to view the Sub-Bands supported by the unitthe supported parameters’ values and options, refer to section 4.2.2.4 . The range depends on the number of Sub-Bands supported by the country codeThe default selection is Sub-Band 1. . Operation and Administration 95
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration 4.2.6.2.4.2 The e frequencies that will be able frequencies according to the SutheThe4.2.6.2.4.3 Sh Definitions, the selected Sub-Band parameters and the current operating frequency will be displayed. The current e next lso displayed. 4.2.6.2.5 Best AU Parameters (SU) An SU that can communicate with more than one AU using the same ESSID may AU it "finds", not necessarily the best choice in terms of quality of communication. The same limitation also exists if only one AU entical to the one used by the SU, as it is not always necessarily the best choice. The e density can accumulate to create substantial est for load sharing together with the desire to best AU in its neighborhood. U decision according to the information gathered. The AU with the highest quality by defining a specific AU as the preferred AU. Frequency Subset Definition Frequency Subset Definition parameter defines thused by the SU when scanning for an AU. The availb-Band are displayed, and each of the frequencies in the list is associated with an index. The frequencies subset can be defined by entering the indexes of required frequencies, or “A” to select all available frequencies. default is the complete list of frequencies available in the Sub-Band. ow Frequency Definitions Upon selecting the Show Frequencydefined frequency subset as well as the defined subset (to be used after threset) are abecome associated with the first in the neighborhood has an ESSID id topology of a fixed access network is constantly changing. Changes in basstation deployment and subscriberchanges in SU performance. The qucreate best throughput conditions for the SU created the need for the Best AU feature, to enable an SU to connect to theWhen the Best AU feature is used, each of the AUs is given a quality mark based on the level at which it is received by the SU. The SU scans for a configured number of cycles, gathering information from all the AUs with which it can communicate. At the end of the scanning period, the SU reaches a Best Amark is selected as the Best AU, and the SU will immediately try to associate withit. The quality mark given to each AU depends on the level at which it is receivedby the SU. The Best AU selection mechanism can be overridden NOTE Although the SU selects the Best AU based on long-term conditions prior to the decision time, it may not always be connected to the instantaneous Best AU at any given time. Note also that the decision is made only once during the scanning interval. The decision may not remain the optimal one for ever. If there are significant changes in deployment of neighboring AUs and the SUs served by them, overall performance may be improved if the applicable SUs are reset intentionally so as to re-initiate the Best AU decision process. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 96
Menus and Parameters The Best AU Parameters menu includes the following options: Best AU Support 4.2.6.2.5.1 The Best AU Support option enables or disables the Best AU selection feature. The default is Disable. NOTE If the Best AU feature is not used, the SU associates with the first AU it finds whose ESSID or Operator ESSID is identical to its own ESSID. 4.2.6.2.5.2 that the process will be repeated for all relevant frequencies. A higher number may result 4.2.6.2.5.3 ing control of the SUs association is a powerful tool in network management. The Preferred AU MAC Address parameter is intended for U ble AU it nd f the preferred AU is not found, the SU will he decision reached using the best AU The default value for the Preferred AU MAC Address is 00-00-00-00-00-00 (12 4.2.6.2.5.4 Show Best AU Parameters and Data the unit can communicate:  MAC Address Number Of Scanning Attempts When the Best AU option is enabled, the SU gathers information on neighboring AUs for approximately 2 seconds on each of the scanned frequencies. The Number of Scanning Attempts parameter defines the number of times in a better decision at the cost of an increased scanning time during which the SU is not operational. Valid values: 1 - 255. Default value: 4. Preferred AU MAC Address The Preferred AU MAC Address parameter defines a specific AU with which the SU should associate. Gainapplications where there is a need to dictate the preferred AU with which the Sshould associate. To prevent the SU from associating with the first viafinds, the Best AU Support mechanism should be enabled. Once the SU has identified the preferred AU based on its MAC address, it will associate with it aterminate the scanning process. Iassociate with an AU according to talgorithm. Valid values: A MAC address string. zeros), meaning that there is no preferred AU. The Show Best AU Parameters and Data option displays the applicable information: The Neighboring AU Data table displays the following details for each AU with whichOperation and Administration 97
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration  SNR of the received signal  Mark - The computed quality mark for the AU.  Full - The association load status of the AU. It is defined as full if the number the AU has reached the maximum allowed according to the value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter. An AU whose s computed mark is the highest.  In adisplayed:  Best AU Support ddress of the selected AU) the SU “listens” to the wireless medium for approximately until the SU decides that it should start searching for another AU, is approximately seven seconds. here is a high probability that SUs might need to roam among different AUs, the use of active scanning enables to significantly reduce transmitting a Probe Request at each frequency. This reduces the time spent at The default selection is Passive. 4.2.6.2.7 lgorithm simplifies the inimizing interference to other units. This is achieved by automatically adjusting the power level transmitted by each SU according to the actual level at which it is received of SUs associated withassociations load status is full cannot be selected as the Best AU, even if itESSID - The ESSID of the AU. ddition to the neighboring AU data table, the following information is  Preferred AU MAC Address  Number of Scanning Attempts  Associated AU MAC Address (the MAC a4.2.6.2.6 Scanning Mode (SU only) The Scanning Mode parameter defines whether the SU will use Passive or Active scanning when searching for an AU. In passive scanning,two seconds at each frequency, searching for beacons. The disassociation period, which is the time from the moment the link was lost In some situations when tthe link establishment time. This is achieved by using shorter dwell periods, each frequency as well as the disassociation period. Power Control Parameters The Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) ainstallation process and ensures optimal performance while m BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 98
Menus and Parameters by the AU. To support proper operation of the system with optimal performance terference between neighboring sectors, the ATPC algorithm ed in all units. ntrolled by the AU that calculates for each received frame the average SNR at which it receives transmissions from the specific SU. The average count the previous calculated average, thus reducing the es in link conditions. The weight of history (the sed for calculating the average SNR is determined ed ot in the configured target range, the AU er-down message. The target is that each optimal level, or as high (or low) as possible if the onditions. with transmit power level. provide here may be a need to decrease the transmitted pport relatively small cells and to minimize the eration of neighboring cells, or for compliance with local 4.2.6.2.7.1 ters are defined separately for different modulation d algorithm after either power up or losing synchronization with the and minimum inshould be enablThe algorithm is cocalculation takes into aceffect of short temporary changprevious value) in the formula uby a configurable parameter. In addition, the higher the time that has passed since the last calculation, the lower the impact of history on the calculataverage. If the average SNR is ntransmits to the SU a power-up or a powSU will be received at anoptimal range cannot be reached because of specific link cEach time that the SU tries to associate with the AU (following either a reset or loss of synchronization), it will initiate transmissions using its Transmit Power parameters. If after a certain time the SU does not succeed to synchronizethe AU, it will start increasing theIn an AU the maximum supported transmit power is typically used tomaximum coverage. However, tpower level in order to suinterference with the opregulatory requirements. In some cases the maximum transmit power of the SU should be limited to ensure compliance with applicable regulations or for other reasons. Different power levels may be used for different modulation levels to optimize performance taking into account the different modulation schemes as well as possible regulatory restrictions. Transmit Power The Transmit Power paramelevels. In the AU, the Transmit Power parameter defines the fixed transmit power level and is not part of the ATPC algorithm. In the SU, The Initial Transmit Power parameter defines the fixed transmit power level when the ATPC algorithm is disabled. If the ATPC Option is enabled the value configured for this parameter serves for setting the initial value to be useby the ATPCAU. Operation and Administration 99
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration The minimum value for the Transmit Power Parameters is -10 dBm. (The ATPC actual transmit power of the SU to lower values). The maximum ower Parameter depends on several unit properties and as defined for the applicable Sub-Band, together with the a Gain. The Maximum EIRP of AUs (defined as Point-to-lti-Point equipment) cannot exceed a certain value. In these cases the to view the Sub-Bands supported by the unit and the alues and options, refer to section 4.2.2.4 may reduce thevalue of the Transmit Pparameters:  The modulation level  The Maximum Allowed Tx Power as defined for the applicable Sub-Band.  The Maximum EIRPvalue of the AntennMuTransmit Power cannot exceed the value of (Maximum EIRP – Antenna Gain).  Maximum Tx Power parameter (in SU only) For information on howsupported parameters’ v . ter is selected. 4 2.6.2.7.2 er (SU only) aximum Tx Power parameter limits the maximum transmit power that can or the Maximum Tx Power is -10 dBm. The maximum value ted parameters’ values and options, refer to section 4.2.2.4 The unit calculates the maximum allowed Transmit Power according to the unit properties and parameters listed above, and displays the allowed range when a Transmit Power parameThe default Transmit Power is the highest allowed value. . Maximum Tx PowThe Mbe reached by the ATPC algorithm. It also sets the upper limits for the Transmit Power parameters. The minimum value fdepends on several unit properties and parameters:  The modulation level  The Maximum Allowed Tx Power as defined for the applicable Sub-Band. For information on how to view the Sub-Bands supported by the unit and the suppor . ter is selected. The unit calculates the maximum allowed Maximum Tx Power according to the unit properties and parameters listed above, and displays the allowed range whenthe Maximum Tx Power parameThe default Maximum Tx Power is the highest allowed value. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 100
Menus and Parameters 4.2.6.2.7.3 4.2.6.2.7.3.1be 4.2.6.2.7.3.3 ATPC Delta from Minimum SNR Level TheyourecMaAvailable values: 4 to 20 (dB). 4.2.6.2.7.3.4 MinThe e bet p/power-down messages to a specific SU. Setting a 4.2.6.2.7.3.5 SUs t -Default value: 5 (dB) ATPC Parameters in AU ATPC Option The ATPC Option enables or disables the Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) algorithm. The default is Enable. 4.2.6.2.7.3.2 ATPC Minimum SNR Level The Minimum SNR Level defines the lowest SNR at which you want each SU to received at the AU (the lower limit of the optimal reception level range). Available values: 4 to 60 (dB). Default value: 28 (dB). Delta from Minimum SNR Level is used to define the highest SNR at which want each SU to be received at the AU (the higher limit of the optimal eption level range): x. Level=Minimum SNR Level + Delta from Minimum SNR Level. Default value: 11 (dB). imum Interval Between ATPC Messages Minimum Interval Between ATPC Messages parameter sets the minimal timween consecutive power-ulow value for this parameter may lead to higher overhead and to an excessive rate of power level changes at the SUs. High values for this parameter increase the time it will take the SUs to reach optimal transmit power level. Available values: 1 to 3600 seconds. Default value: 30 seconds. ATPC Power Level Step The ATPC Power Level Step parameter defines the step size to be used by thefor incrementing/decrementing the Current Transmit Power after receiving a power-up/power-down message. If the distance between the value of the CurrenTransmit Power and the desired range is smaller than the step size, the powerup/power-down message will include the specific step value required for this condition. Valid range: 1-20 (dB) Operation and Administration 101
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration 4.2.6.2.7.4 ATPC Parameters in SU 4.2.6.2.7.4.1t immediately. However, when nsmit power level will remain at the last Current Transmit Power determined by the ATPC algorithm before it was the value configured for the Initial Transmit Power t reset or following loss of synchronization. ATPC Option The ATPC Option enables or disables the Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) algorithm. The parameter takes effecchanged from Enable to Disable, the tradisabled. It will change to parameter only after the nexThe default is Enable. NOTE The accuracy of the Transmit Power level is typically +/- 1 dB. However, at levels that are 15 dB or more below the maximum supported by the hardware, the accuracy is +/- 3 dB. At these levels the use of ATPC may cause significant fluctuations in the power level of the transmitted signal. When operating at such low levels, it is recommended to disable the ATPC Option and to set the Transmit Power parameter to the average Tx Power level before the ATPC was disabled. 4.2.6.2.7.5 n enables turning Off/On the AU’s transmitter. This feature Tx Control (AU only) The Tx Control optiocan be used during maintenance or testing to avoid transmissions using undesired parameters. The parameter is available only when managing the unit from its Ethernet port. The default is On. NOTE The unit is reset immediately upon configuring the Tx Control parameter to either On or Off (even if it is set to its current option). 4.2.6.2.8 Antenna Gain The Antenna Gain parameter enables to define the net gain of a detached antenna. The configured gain should take into account the attenuation of tcable connecting the antenna to the unit. The Antenhe na Gain is important especially in cases when there is a limit on the EIRP allowed for the unit; the meters cannot exceed the read-only parameter in the applicable “Show” menus. The imp actual value (in the 0 to 50) is configured. The unit can be configured to maximum allowed value for the Transmit Power paravalue of (EIRP - Antenna Gain), where the EIRP is defined in the selected Sub-Band. In certain units with an integral antenna the Antenna Gain is not available as a configurable parameter. However, it is available as a range is 0–50 (dB). A value of “Don’t Care” means that the actual value is notortant. A value of “Not Set Yet” means that the unit will not transmit until the range BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 102
Menus and Parameters “Don’t Care” or “Not Set Yet” only in factory. Once a value is configured, it is not sible to reconfigure the unit to either “Don’t Care” or “Not Set Yet”. default value depends on unit type. In SUs with integral antenna it is set to (read only). The default value for AUs that are supplied with a detached nna is in accordance with the antenna’s gain. In units supplied without an posThe19 ante4.2.6.2.9 be adapted to the distances of SUs from the serving AU: ts for a response message before retransmission (acknowledge time delay) should take into account the round trip propagation of the farthest SU. (The one-way propagation delay at 5 GHz is 3.3 etween SUs located should also take e r ual mode, this distance is configured ce from each of the SUs it serves, determine which SU is located the rthest and use the estimated distance of the farthest SU as the maximum ce. to t of the cell. In certain situations, the operator may decide to improve the overall throughput by reducing the slot size below the value required for full fairness. This means that when there is competition for bandwidth, the back-off algorithm will give an advantage to SUs that are located closer to the AU. The Cell Distance Parameters menu includes the following parameters: antenna the default is typically “Not Set Yet”. Cell Distance Parameters (AU only) The higher the distance of an SU from the AU that is serving it, the higher the time it takes for messages sent by one of them to reach the other. To ensure appropriate services to all SUs regardless of their distance from the AU while maintaining a high overall performance level, two parameters should  The time that a unit waidelay microsecond/km.) The higher the distance from the AU of the farthest SU served by it, the higher the acknowledge time delay for all units in the cell should be.  To ensure fairness in the contention back-off algorithm bat different distances from the AU, the size of the time slot into account the one-way propagation delay. The size of the time slot of all units in the cell should be proportional to the distance from the AU of thfarthest SU served by it. The distance from the AU of the farthest SU served by it can be determined eithemanually or automatically. In manmanually. In automatic mode, the AU uses a special algorithm to estimate its distanfadistanIt should be noted that if the size of the time slot used by all units is adaptedthe distance of the farthest unit, then no unit will have an advantage when competing for services. However, this reduces the overall achievable throughpuOperation and Administration 103
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration 4.2.6.2.9.1 ll Distance Mode option defines whether the maximum distance of the AU meter) or automatically. 4.2.6.2.9.2 l meaning for No representing the f 9 4.2.6.2.9.3 The Fairness Factor enables to define the level of fairness in providing services to t to 100%, all SUs have the same probability of getting r bandwidth. If set to X%, then SUs located up to X% of the maximum distance from the AU will have an advantage in getting services 4.2.6.2.9.4 Show Cell Distance Parameters it 4.2.6.2.10 called Inter-Frame Spacing (IFS). This is the time during which the unit determines whether pends on the llows: oseconds. Cell Distance Mode The Cefrom any of the SUs it serves will be determined manually (using the Maximum Cell Distance paraThe Options are Automatic or Manual. The default is Automatic. Maximum Cell Distance The Maximum Cell Distance parameter allows configuring the maximum distancewhen the Cell Distance Mode option is Manual. The range is 0 to 54 (Km). The value of 0 has a speciaCompensation: Acknowledge Time Out is set to a valuemaximum distance of 54 km. The time slot size is set to its minimal value omicroseconds. The default is 0 (No Compensation). Fairness Factor different SUs. When seservices when competing foover SUs located farther than this distance. The range is 0 to 100 (%) The default is 100 (%). Select Show Cell Distance Parameters to view the Cell Distance parameters. In addition, the Measured Maximum Cell Distance and the MAC address of the unthat the mechanism found to be the farthest from the AU are displayed. Adistance of 1 km means any distance below 2 km. Arbitration Inter-Frame Spacing (AIFS) The time interval between two consecutive transmissions of frames isthe medium is idle using the carrier sense mechanism. The IFS detype of the next frame to be transmitted, as fo SIFS (Short Inter-Frame Spacing) is used for certain frames that should be transmitted immediately, such as ACK and CTS frames. The value of SIFS is 16 micr BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 104
Menus and Parameters  DIFS (Distributed coordination function Inter-Frame Spacing) is typically used edium is free. If the unit decides that the on by DIFS plus a number of time for other frame types when the mmedium is not free, it will defer transmissislots as determined by the Contention Window back-off algorithm (see section 4.2.6.5.2 ) after reaching a decision that the medium has become free. FS, where AIFS can be configured to one or two time d be configured to two time slots. A value of 1 should nt-to-point link, where in the other slots. This ensures that the unit DIFS equal SIFS plus AIslots. Typically, AIFS shoulonly be used in one of the two units in a poiunit the AIFS remains configured to two timewith AIFS configured to one has an advantage over the other unit, provided that the Minimum Contention Window (section 4.2.6.5.2 ) parameter in both units is configured to 0 to disable the contention window back-off algorithm. The available options are 1 or 2 (time slots). The default is 2 time slots. CAUTION An AIFS value of 1 should only be used in point-to-point applications. Otherwise the default value of 2 must always be used. In a point-to-point link, only one unit should be configured to an AIFS value of 1. When both units need to transmit, the unit with an AIFS value of 1 will have an advantage over the unit with AIFS of 2. In this case, the Minimum Contention Window parameter in both units must be configured to 0 to disable the contention window back-off algorithm. 4.2.6.2.11 r of Associations parameter defines the maximum number selected AU, while still to 5. and AU-SA is 512. For AUS-BS and AUS-SA the default is 5. Maximum Number of Associations (AU only) The Maximum Numbeof Subscriber Units that can be associated with theguaranteeing the required quality of service to customers. Available values for AU-BS and AU-SA range from 0 to 512. For AUS-BS and AUS-SA the range is from 0Default value for AU-BS NOTE When the Data Encryption Option is enabled, the actual maximum number of SUs that can associate with the AU-BS or AU-SA is limited to 124. The number displayed for the Maximum Number of Associations is the value configured for this parameter, which might be higher than the actu imit (512 when Data Encryption is disabled, al limit. The Maximum Number of Associations L124 the Show Air Interface Parameters display. when Data Encryption is enabled) is indicated inOperation and Administration 105
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration NOTE There is no aging time for SUs. An SU is only removed from the list of associated SUs under the following conditions:  A SNAP frame is received from another AU indicating that the SU is now associated with the other AU.  The SU failed to respond to a certain number of consecutive frames transmitted by the AU and is considered to have "aged out". Therefore, the database of associated SUs may include units no longer associated with the AU. If the number of associated SUs has reached the value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter, the selected AU cannot serve additional SUs. To view the current number of associated SUs, use the Display Association Info option in the MAC Address Database menu. To delete inactive SUs from the database you must reset the AU. 4.2.6.2.12 Wireless Link Trap Threshold (AU only) lity trap, indicating that the quality of the wireless link has dropped bove (off trap) the specified threshold. The Wireless Link Trap Threshold is in percentage of retransmissions, and the 4.2.6.2.13 Gaining knowledge of the noise characteristics per channel enables construction rder to gain information regar location of the unit, the unit will enter a definite period, during which information will be gathe the channels comprising the selected sub ill automatically reset. During the information-gathering period the unit will not receive nor transmit data. It 4.2.6.2.13.1 channel during each cycle for information gathering when performing spectrum The Wireless Link Trap Threshold parameter defines the threshold for the wireless quabelow (on trap) or has increased aallowed range is from 1 to 100 (%). The default is 30 (%). Spectrum Analysis of a relatively noise free working environment. In oding noise characteristics in thepassive scanning mode forred. The scanned channels will beset. Upon activating the spectrum analysis the unit walso will not be able to synchronize/associate, meaning that it cannot be managed via the wireless link. During the spectrum analysis period the unitsecurity mode is changed to promiscuous to enable gathering information regarding all legal frames received by the unit. At the end of the period the unit will reset automatically regaining normal operability upon start up. The Spectrum Analysis submenu includes the following options: Spectrum Analysis Channel Scan Period The Spectrum Analysis Channel Scan Period is the period of staying on each analysis. Range: 2-30 seconds. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 106
Menus and Parameters Default value: 5 seconds. 4.2.6.2.13.2 Spectrum Analysis Scan Cycles The Spectrum Analysis Scan Cycle is the number of scanning cycles when RangDefault value: 2 cycles. 4.2.6.2.13.3 nel Selection (AU only) s weather the AU will choose the best noise free channel upon startup after completion of the spectrum analysis 4.2.6.2.13.4 Spectrum Analysis Activation The Spectrum analysis Activation option enables activation of the spectrum will reset automatically and start-up in spectrum analysis mode. 4.2.6.2.13.5 ctrum Analysis Information option enables resetting the spectrum 4.2.6. .13.6 nformation Display option enables viewing the results of ormation includes the following details OFDM frames with  performing Spectrum Analysis. e: 1-100 cycles. Automatic ChanThe Automatic Channel selection option defineprocess. The selection is per analysis: when the analysis is completed it will be disabled automatically. The default is Disable. analysis process. Upon activation, the unit Reset Spectrum Analysis Information The Reset Speanalysis counters. Spectrum Analysis Information Display The Spectrum Analysis I2the last analysis process. The displayed inffor each channel:  Frequency in MHz  Signal Count: The number of signals (excluding OFDM frames with the correct bandwidth) in the channel.  Signal SNR: The approximate SNR of signals (excluding the correct bandwidth) in the channel.  Signal Width: The average width in microseconds of signals (excluding OFDM frames with the correct bandwidth) in the channel. OFDM Frames: The number of OFDM frames with the correct bandwidth detected in the channel. Operation and Administration 107
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration 4.2.6.2.13.7 The y whressamopt4.2.6.2.14 Lost Beacons Transmission Watchdog Threshold as TrabeaThe e being 218. When the parameter is set to 0, this feature is disabled, i.e. internal refresh will never be or to e association process, including the search for the a full 4.2.6.3 m unauthorized access by defining a set of discrete IP addresses as well as IP red. cess may be permitted from the rnet only, or from both. lowing options: Spectrum Analysis Information Display - Continuous Spectrum Analysis Information Display - Continuous option is available onlen the analysis process is active. It enables viewing the continuously updated ults of the current analysis process. The displayed information includes the e details available for a regular Spectrum Analysis Information Display ion. When it is unable to send beacon frames for a predetermined period of time, suchin the case of interferences, the AU resets itself. The Lost Beacons nsmission Threshold parameter represents the number of consecutive lost cons after which the unit will reset itself. range for this parameter is 100 – 1000, its default valuperformed. 4.2.6.2.15 Disassociate (AU only) The Disassociate feature enables disassociating all SUs associated with the AUa selected SU. This feature is useful during configuration changes, enablingforce the SU(s) to re-initiate thbest AU (or a preferred AU) using the Best AU process, without performing reset. The Disassociate submenu includes two options:  Disassociate All SUs  Disassociate SU By MAC Address: to disassociate a selected SU Network Management Parameters The Network Management Parameters menu enables protecting the Unit froaddress ranges from which the unit can be managed using protocols such as Telnet, FTP, TFTP, SNMP, DHCP and ICMP. This excludes management messages generated in the unit, such as Traps or Ping Test frames, which are not filteThe direction from which management access is permitted can also be configured, which means that management acwireless medium only, from the wired EtheThe Network Management Parameters menu includes the fol Access to Network Management  Network Management Filtering BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 108
Menus and Parameters  Set Network Management IP address  Delete a Network Management IP Address  Delete All Network Management IP Addresses  Set/Change Network Management IP Address Ranges  SNMP Traps Access to Network Management 4.2.6.3.1 The Access to Network Management option defines the port through which the ink Only thernet and Wireless Link The default selection is From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link. unit can be managed. The following options are available:  From Wireless L From Ethernet Only  From Both E CAUTION Be careful not to block your access to the unit. For example, if you manage an SU via the wireless link, setting the Access to Network Management parameter to From Ethernet Only completely blocks your management access to the unit. In this case, a technician may be required to change the settings at the user's site. 4.2.6.3.2 s the IP address If management filtering is enabled, the unit can only be managed by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in either the unit via the available:  Activate IP Filter on Ethernet Port: Applicable only if the Access to Network ink. The unit can be managed from the Ethernet IP addresses matching one of the entries in the Set dress based filtering is configured for the wireless port. Network Management Filtering The Network Management Filtering option enables or disablebased management filtering.the Network Management IP Addresses list or in the Network Management IP Address Ranges list, described below, and that are connected todefined port(s). The following options are Disable: No IP address based filtering is configured. Management parameter is configured to either From Ethernet Only or From Both Ethernet and Wireless Lport only by stations with Network Management IP Addresses parameter. If the Access to Network Management parameter is configured to From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link then no IP adOperation and Administration 109
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration  Activate IP Filter on Wireless Link Port: Applicable only if the Access to Network Management parameter is configured to either From Wireless Link f the er. If the Access Both Ethernet and Wireless Link then no IP address based filtering is configured for the Ethernet d Wireless Link Ports: Applicable to all options of the Access to Network Management parameter. The unit can be e Access to Network Management parameter only by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in nagement IP Addresses parameter. . 4.2.6.3.3 Set Network Management IP Address The Set Network Management IP Address option enables defining up to 10 IP anage the unit if the Network Management Filtering option is enabled. dress is 0.0.0.0 (all 10 addresses). k Management IP Address 4.2.6.3.5 4.2.6.3.6 Set/Change enables defining, n be managed if the Network Management Filtering option is enabled. This is in addition to the he Network Management menu that enable defining, updating and deleting discrete IP addresses. ng options: 4.2.6.3.6.1 gement IP Address Ranges The Set/Change Network Management IP Address Ranges option enables to 10 IP address ranges from which the unit can be managed if the Network Management Filtering option is enabled. Only or From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link. The unit can be managed from the wireless port only by stations with IP addresses matching one oentries in the Set Network Management IP Addresses parametto Network Management parameter is configured to From port.  Activate IP filter on Both Ethernet anmanaged from the port(s) defined by ththe Set Network MaThe default selection is Disableaddresses of devices that can mThe default Network Management IP Ad4.2.6.3.4 Delete a NetworThe Delete Network Management IP Address option enables deleting IP addressentries from the Network Management IP Addresses list. Delete All Network Management IP Addresses The Delete All Network Management IP Addresses option enables deleting all entries from the Network Management IP Addresses list. Network Management IP Address Ranges The Set/Change Network Management IP address Ranges menuupdating or deleting IP address ranges from which the unit caprevious options in tThe menu includes the followiSet/Change Network Manadefining/updating up BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 110
Menus and Parameters The default Network Management IP Address Range is 0.0.0.0 TO 0.0.0.0 (all 10 ranges). A rang either a start and end t address> to <end address>” (example: 192.168.1.1 address and a mask, in the format “<base address> 4.2.6.3.6.2 ess Range option enables deleting IP ork Management IP Address Ranges list. 4.2.6.3.6.3 rk Management IP Address Ranges all entries from the Network Management IP Address Ranges list. 4.2.6.3.7 SNThe can4.2.6.3.7.1 The Send SNMP Traps option enables or disables the sending of SNMP traps. The4.2.6.3.7.2 SNaddThe IP destinations is 0.0.0.0. 4.2.6.3.7.4 eleting Trap address entries from st. 4.2.6.3.7.5 The Delete All Trap Addresses option enables deleting all entries from the SNMP Traps Addresses list. e can be defined using a string that includes address, in the format “<starto 192.168.1.255), or a basemask <mask>” (example: 192.168.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0). Delete Network Management IP Address Range The Delete Network Management IP Addraddress range entries from the NetwDelete All NetwoThe Delete All Network Management IP Address Ranges option enables deleting MP Traps SNMP submenu enables or disables the transmission of SNMP Traps. If this option is enabled, up to 10 IP addresses of stations to which SNMP traps are sent be defined. Send SNMP Traps default selection is Disable. MP Traps Destination IP Addresses The SNMP Traps Destination IP Addresses submenu enables defining up to 10 IP resses of devices to which the SNMP Traps are to be sent. default of all 10 SNMP Traps4.2.6.3.7.3 SNMP Traps CommunityThe SNMP Traps Community option enables defining the Community name for each IP address to which SNMP Trap messages are to be sent. Valid strings: Up to 8 ASCII characters. The default for all 10 addresses is “public”, which is the default Read community.Delete One Trap Address The Delete One Trap Address option enables dthe SNMP Traps Addresses liDelete All Trap Addresses Operation and Administration 111
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration 4.2.6.4 The Bridge Parameters menu provides a series of parameter sets that enables traThe VLAN Support  Ethernet Broadcast Filtering (SU only)   Unicast Relaying (AU only)  MAC Address Deny List (AU only) 4.2.6.4.1 VLAN Support The VLAN Support menu enables d EEE 802.1Q compliant VLAN aware (Virtual LAN aware) feature of the units. Each stations that can co t cannot communicate with stations belongin ure also vides the ability to set traffic pri ion of certain frames. The related to the VLAN is incl ag Header, which is frame between the MAC header and the data. VLAN implementation in BreezeACCESS 4900 units supports frame routing by port onnected to only one VLAN. The llowing parameters: Bridge Parameters configuring parameters such as control and filtering options for broadcast nsmissions, VLAN support, and Type of Service prioritization. Bridge Parameters menu includes the following options: Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter  Bridge Aging Time  Roaming Option (SU only)  Broadcast Relaying (AU only) efining the parameters related to the IVLAN includes mmunicate with each other, bug to different VLANs. The VLAN featproinformation orities for transmissuded in the VLAN Tinserted in each information, whereby each port is c VLAN Support menu includes the fo VLAN Link Type VLAN ID – Data (SU only)  VLAN ID – Management  VLAN Forwarding BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 112
Menus and Parameters  VLAN Relaying (AU only) 4.2.6.4.1.1 VLAN -Data (SU only) set to Access Link. It enables defining the VLAN ID for data frames, which identifies the VLAValid values range from 1 to 4094. Default value: 1. The VLAN ID-Data affects frames received from the wireless link port, as follows: nly tagged frames with a VLAN AN ID-Data defined in the unit are forwarded to the Ethernet port. ers are removed from the data frames received from the wireless ey are transmitted on the Ethernet port. frames received from the Ethernet port, as follows: in all untagged frames received from the port before transmission on the wireless link. The tag includes the the VLAN ID-Data and the VLAN Priority-Data parameters. ort, are discarded. This includes frames with tagging for prioritization purposes only. 4.2.6.4.1.2 e anagement frames, which identifies remote stations for ervers/stations using these protocols must tag the management frames sent to it with the value of the VLAN ID-Management parameter.  VLAN Traffic Priority IDThe VLAN ID-Data is applicable only when the VLAN Link Type parameter isN to which the unit belongs.  O ID (VID) equal to the VL The tag headlink before thThe VLAN ID-Data affects  A VLAN Data Tag is insertedEthernetvalues of Tagged frames received on Ethernet port, which are meant to be forwarded tothe wireless link pVLAN ID-Management The VLAN ID-Management is applicable for all link types. It enables defining thVLAN ID for mmanagement purposes. This applies to all management applications using protocols such as SNMP, TFTP, ICMP (ping), DHCP and Telnet. All sthe unValid values: 1 to 4094 or 65535 (No VLAN). The default value is 65535. If the VLAN ID-Management is other than 65535: Operation and Administration 113
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration  Only tagged management frames with a matching VLAN ID received on either Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the unit. d the VLAN Priority-If the VLAN ID-Management is 65535 (No VLAN):  Only untagged management frames received on either the Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the u Management frames generated by the unit are not tagged. The following table summarizes the nt port in accordance with the value of the gement parameter. The table is k types. Refer to the - Access Link and Trunk Link options for some restrictions when configuring this parameter. Table 4-6: VLAN Managem ionality the A VLAN Management Tag is inserted in all management frames generated by the unit before transmission on either the Ethernet or wireless link port. Thetag includes the values of the VLAN ID-Management anManagement parameters. nit. functionality of the internal managemeVLAN ID-Manavalid for all lin VLAN Link Typeent Port FunctAction Management Port - Internal Receive from Ethernet ed frames, matching VID-M Untagged frames when VID-M=65535 TaggReceive from Wireless Tagged frames, matching VID-M Untagged frames when VID-M=65535 Transmit Insert VID-M, PID-M Table Legend:  VID- PID-M: VLAN Priority-Managem4.2.6.4 pe Type parameter ena defining the functionality of the VLAN e capability of the unit. The available options are Hybrid Link, Trunk Link and Access Link (Access Link is available only in SUs). The default selection is Hybrid Link. M: VLAN ID-Management ent .1.3 VLAN Link TyThe VLAN Link blesawaroption BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 114
Menus and Parameters 4.2.6.4.1.3.1 Access Link (SU only) Access Link transfers frames while tagging/untagging them since all devicesconnected to the unit are VLAN unaware. Thus, the unit cannot transfer taggedframes. Table 4-7 summarizes the func tionality of the data port for an Access link. Table 4-7: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Access Link Action Data Port - SU Receiv ernet Untagged frames e from EthAccep es, matching VID-D t from Wireless Tagged framTag In VID-D, PID-D (to wireless) sert Tag Remove Yes (to Ethernet) Table Legend:  VID-D: VLAN ID-Data  PID-D: VLAN Priority-Data 4.2.6.4.1.3.2es, as all devices connected to the unit are ink ed. Trunk Link Trunk Link transfers only tagged framVLAN aware. Only tagged data frames received on the Ethernet or wireless lports are forward CAUTION It is not recommended that you configure a unit as a Trunk Link with the VLAN ID-Management parameter set at 65535, as it does not forward any 'NO VLAN' management frames to its other port, making it impossible to manage devices connected behind the unit that are also configured with 'NO VLAN'. If the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled, a data frame received with a VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit's VLAN Forwarding List is discarded. NOTE If the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled, be sure to include the VLAN ID-Management value of all units that should be managed via the wireless port of the unit, in the Forwarding List. If the VLAN Relaying option is enabled in an AU, a data frame relayed with a VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit's VLAN Relaying List is discarded. Operation and Administration 115
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration NOTE If the VLAN Relaying option is enabled and you manage your devices from behind an SU unit, be sure to include the VLAN ID-Management value of all units to be managed when relaying via the wireless port of the AU unit, in the Relaying List. If the VLAN Forwarding option is also enabled in the AU, these VLAN IDs should also be included in the Forwarding List. Table 4-8 summarizes the functionality of the data port for a Trunk link. Table 4-8: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Trunk Link Action Data Port – AU and SU Accept from Ethernet Tagged frames. ng list If Forwarding is enabled, only frames with VLAN ID values which are included in the ForwardiAccep Tagged frames If Forwarding is enabled, only frames with t from Wireless VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding list Tag In No sert Tag Remove No 4.2.6.4.1.3.3 Hybrid ybrid Link transfers both tagged and untagged frames, as the devices connected unit can be either VLAN aware or VLAN unaware. This is equivalent to Data Port Functionality - Hybrid Link Link Hto the defining no VLAN support, as the unit is transparent to VLAN. Table 4-9 summarizes the functionality of the data port for a Hybrid link. Table 4-9: VLAN Action Data Port – AU and SU Accept from Ethernet All Accept from Wireless All Tag Insert No Tag R No emove BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 116
Menus and Parameters 4.2.6.4.1.4 VLAN Forwarding (AU and SU) The VLAN Forwarding feature is applicable for Trunk Links only. It enabdefining the VLAN ID values to be included in the VLAN Forwarding List. If the Link Type is defined as a Trunk Link and the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled,a data frame received with a VLAN ID that is not a member of thles e unit's VLAN Forwarding List is discarded. The VLAN Forwarding submenu provides the following options: The VLAN Forwarding Support option enables or disables the VLAN Forwarding 4.2.6.4.1.4.2dding a VLAN ID to the VLAN ID can be entered at a time. The maximum number of 94. 4.2.6.4.1.4.4 4.2.6.4.1.4.1 VLAN Forwarding Support feature. Available selections are Disable and Enable. The default selection is Disable. Add Forwarding VLAN ID The Add Forwarding VLAN ID option enables aForwarding List. One VLAN VLAN IDs in the VLAN Forwarding List is 20. Valid values are 1 to 404.2.6.4.1.4.3 Remove Forwarding VLAN ID The Remove Forwarding VLAN ID option enables removing a VLAN ID from the VLAN ID Forwarding List. Valid values are VID values (from 1 to 4094) that are included in the VLAN Forwarding List. Show VLAN ID Forwarding List The Show VLAN Forwarding List option displays the values of the VLAN IDs included in the VLAN Forwarding List. NOTE If the VLAN ID Forwarding List is empty and the VLAN Forwarding Support is set to Enable, then all data frames are discarded. If VLAN Relaying Support and VLAN Forwarding Support are both enabled, then all VLAN IDs configured in the Relaying List must also be configured in the Forwarding List. 4.2.6.4.1.5 ble for Trunk Links only. It enables defining the VLAN ID values to be included in the VLAN Relaying List. If the Link Type is N Relaying Support option is enabled, a frame relayed from the wireless link, which is a frame received from the wireless link that should be transmitted back through the wireless link, with a VLAN ID that is VLAN Relaying (AU only) The VLAN Relaying feature is applicadefined as Trunk Link and the VLAOperation and Administration 117
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration not a member of the unit's VLAN Relaying List, is discarded. If VLAN Forwarding The VLAN Relaying menu provides the following options: 4.2.6.4.1.5.1 featThe lection is Disable. 4.2.6.4.1.5.2 The VLAN ID to the VLAN Relaying List. One VLAN ID can be entered at a time. The maximum number of ist is 20. 4.2.6.4.1.5.3e VLAN in the VLAN Relaying List. 4.2.6.4.1.5.4The Show VLAN Relaying option displays the values of the VLAN IDs included in Support is also enabled, it is necessary to configure all the VLAN IDs in the Relaying List also in the Forwarding List to enable the relaying operation. VLAN Relaying Support The VLAN Relaying Support option enables or disables the VLAN Relaying ure. Available selections are Disable and Enable. default seAdd Relaying VLAN ID Add Relaying VLAN ID option enables adding a VLAN IDs in the VLAN Relaying LValid values are 1 to 4094. Remove Relaying VLAN ID The Remove Relaying VLAN ID option enables removing a VLAN ID from thID Relaying List. Valid values are VID values (from 1 to 4094)) that are included Show VLAN ID Relaying List the VLAN Relaying List. NOTE If the VLAN ID Relaying List is empty and the VLAN Relaying Support is Enabled, then all data frames relayed from the wireless link are discarded. If VLAN Relaying Support and VLAN Forwarding Support are both enabled, then all VLAN IDs configured in the Relaying List must also be configured in the Forwarding List. 4.2.6.4.1.6 andle the packet. In version 3.2 all parameters that affect prioritization within the BreezeACCES 4900 system, including VLAN-The :  VLAN Priority – Management VLAN Traffic Priority The VLAN Traffic Priority menu enables configuring the VLAN Priority field in applicable frames. These parameters only impact the way in which other VLAN aware devices in the network will hbased prioritization, are located in the Services > Traffic Prioritization menu. VLAN Traffic Priority menu includes the following parameters VLAN Priority – Data (SU only) BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 118
Menus and Parameters 4.2.6.4.1.6.1 ble for Access Links only. It enables ly 4.2.6.4.1.6.2 VLfiel n units with VLAN ID-Management that is other than 65535. All management frames are routed to the High queue. This other VLAN aware devices handle the packet. 4.2.6.4.1.7 4.2.6.4.2 lticast filtering capabilities for the selected SU. Filtering the the following parameters: erride Filter er VLAN Priority - Data (SU only)The VLAN Priority - Data is applicaconfiguring the value of the VLAN Priority field for data frames transmitted to the wireless link. All data frames are routed to the Low queue. This parameter onimpacts the way other VLAN aware devices handle the packet. Valid values range from 0 to 7. The default value is 0. AN Priority - Management The VLAN Priority - Management enables defining the value of the VLAN Priority d for management frames iparameter only impacts the way Valid values range from 0 to 7. The default value is 4 for SUs and 0 for AUs. Show VLAN Parameters The Show VLAN Parameters option displays the current values of the VLAN support parameters. Ethernet Broadcast Filtering (SU only) The Ethernet Broadcast Filtering menu enables defining the layer 2 (Ethernet) broadcast and muEthernet broadcasts enhances the security of the system and saves bandwidth on the wireless medium by blocking protocols that are typically used in the customer's LAN but are not relevant for other customers, such as NetBios, which is used by the Microsoft Network Neighborhood. Enabling this feature blocks Ethernet broadcasts and multicasts by setting the I/G bit at the destination address to 1. This feature should not be enabled when there is a router behind the SU. The Ethernet Broadcast Filtering menu includes  Filter Options  DHCP Broadcast Ov PPPoE Broadcast Override Filt ARP Broadcast Override Filter Operation and Administration 119
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration 4.2.6.4.2.1 adcast filtering functionality - filters broadcast messages received from the reless ed sable. The DHCP Broadcast Override Filter option enables or disables the broadcasting ns is set to Enable. Select from the following options:  Disable - DHCP Broadcast messages are filtered or transmitted according to e Filter Options parameter.  Enable - DHCP Broadcast messages are transmitted regardless of the selected 4.2.6.4.2.3 if according to Options parameter, broadcast messages should transmitted if this parameter is set to Enable. Filter Options The Filter Options enables defining the Ethernet Broof the unit. Select from the following options:  Disable - no Ethernet Broadcast Filtering.  On Ethernet Port OnlyEthernet port.  On Wireless Port Only - filters broadcast messages received from the wilink port.  On Both Ethernet and Wireless Ports - filters broadcast messages receivfrom both the Ethernet and wireless link ports. The default selection is Di4.2.6.4.2.2 DHCP Broadcast Override Filter of DHCP messages. Even if according to the selected option in the Filter Optioparameter, broadcast messages should be filtered, DHCP broadcasts are transmitted if this parameterthe general filtering criteria in thvalue of the Filter Options parameter. The default selection is Disable. PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter The PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter option enables or disables the broadcasting of PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) messages. Eventhe selected option in the Filter be filtered, PPPoE broadcasts areSelect from the following options:  Disable - PPPoE Broadcast messages are filtered or transmitted according to the general filtering criteria in the Filter Options parameter.  Enable - PPPoE Broadcast messages are transmitted regardless of the selected value of the Filter Options parameter. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 120
Menus and Parameters The default selection is Disable. 4.2.6.4.2.4 ARP Broadcast Override Filter The ARP Broadcast Override Filter option enables or disables the broadcasting of ARP messages. Even if according to the selected option in the Filter Options parameter, broadcast messages should be filtered, ARP broadcasts are transmitted if this parameter is set to Enable. Select from the following op Disable - ARP messages are filtered or transmittedtions: according to the general filtering criteria in the Filter Options parameter. regardless of the selected value of the Filter Options parameter. 4.2.6.4.3 Ethernet /Multicast Limiter parameters, available in both AU and roadcast and/or multicast packets that can be transmitted per second, in order to prevent the potential flooding of the wireless In SUs, the limiter is placed after the Ethernet Broadcast Filters. For this reason, ets that pass through these filters. If the it p last period. 4.2.6.4.3.1 g broadcast)  Enable - ARP messages are transmittedThe default selection is Enable. Broadcast/Multicast Limiter The Ethernet BroadcastSU, enable to limit the number of bmedium by certain ARP attacks. the limiter will receive only the packEthernet filters of the SU are disabled, the limiter will be applied to all relevant packets received. When the Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter is enabled and the specified limis reached, the unit will send a trap. The trap will be sent periodically till the number of broadcast/multicast packets will be less than the maximum. The trawill inform the user how many packets were discarded in theThe Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter menu allows viewing and setting the following parameters: Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Option The Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Option defines the limiter’s functionality. The available options are:  Disable: No limiter  Limit only Broadcast Packets  Limit Multicast Packets that are not Broadcasts  Limit All Multicast Packets (includinOperation and Administration 121
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration The default selection is Disable. Limiter Threshold m d that will pass the limiter when it is enabled. The range is from 0 to 204800 (packets/second). 4.2.6.4.3.3 The Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Send Trap Interval defines the secutive transmissions of the trap hat were dropped by the limiter since the previous trap (or since the time that the limit has been exceeded). rom 1 to 60 minutes. 4.2.6.4.4 Bridresses of devices on both the wired and wireless sides, not including The available range is 20 to 2000 seconds. The default value is 300 seconds. 4.2.6.4.5 ly) les selecting whether the unit performs broadcast relaying. When the Broadcast Relaying parameter is enabled, s on the wireless link are transmitted by the AU back to the wireless link devices, as well as to the wired LAN. If disabled, e local wired LAN and are not sent back to the wireless link. Disable the broadcast relaying only if all broadcast messages from directed to the wired LAN. The default selection is Enable. 4.2.6.4.6 Unicast Relaying (AU only) option enables selecting whether the unit performs unicast g parameter is enabled, unicast packets less link can be transmitted back to the wireless link devices. If disabled, these packets are not sent to the wireless link even if they are intended for devices on the wireless link. Disable the Unicast Relaying parameter only if all unicast messages from the wireless link are certain to be directed to the local wired LAN. 4.2.6.4.3.2 Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast The Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Threshold defines the maximunumber of packets per seconThe default is 50 packets. Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Send Trap Interval minimum time in minutes between two conindicating the number of packets tThe range is fThe default is 5 minutes. dge Aging Time The Bridge Aging Time parameter enables selecting the bridge aging time for learned adBreezeACCESS 4900 units. Broadcast Relaying (AU onThe Broadcast Relaying option enabbroadcast packets originating from devicethese packets are sent only to ththe wireless link are certain to beThe Unicast Relaying relaying. When the Unicast Relayinoriginating from devices on the wire BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 122
Menus and Parameters The default selection is Enable. 4.2.6.4.7 unit to values different than his subscription plan. . 4.2.6.4.8 dd a MAC Address to the Deny List. 4.2.6.4.9 Remove MAC Address from Deny List 4.2.6.4.9.1 4.2.6.4.10 ion (SU only) or d fast se, U will tworking et port, to facilitate uninterrupted connectivity and correct routing of transmissions to these clients. The new AU as well as the previous AU with which the SU was associated, will forward the SNAP messages to all other SUs associated with them. MAC Address Deny List (AU only) The MAC Address Deny List submenu enables to define units that are not authorized to receive services. The AU will not provide services to a unit whose MAC Address is included in the deny list. This feature enables to disconnect units from the services in cases such as when the user had fraudulently succeeded to configure theThe deny list can include up to 100 MAC AddressesThe MAC Address Deny List submenu includes the following: Add MAC Address to Deny List Select Add MAC Address to Deny List to aSelect Remove MAC Address from Deny List to remove a MAC Address from the Deny List. Show MAC Address Deny List Select Show MAC Address Deny List to display the current list of MAC Addresses included in the Deny List. Roaming OptThe Roaming Option defines the roaming support of the unit. When roaming is not expected, it is preferable to set this parameter to Disable. This will cause the unit to start scanning for another AU after losing connectivity with the current AU only after 7 seconds during which no beacons were received from the current AU. This will prevent scanning for another AU in cases where no beacons were received due to a short temporary problem. When set to Enable, the SU will wait only one second before it starts scanning fanother AU. In addition, when the Roaming Option is enabled, the SU will senRoaming SNAP messages upon associating with a new AU. This enables distribution of the new location for all clients that are behind the SU. In this cathe SU will send multicast SNAP messages via the wireless link each time it associates with a new AU, except for the first association after reset. The Ssend one SNAP message for each client learned on its Ethernet port, based on its bridging table. In the SNAP message the clients’ MAC address is used as the source address. The AU that receives this SNAP message learns from it the new location of the clients. It forwards the SNAP to other AUs and Layer-2 neequipment via its EthernOperation and Administration 123
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration The default is Disable. 4.2.6.4.11 Ports Control (SU only) 4.2.6.4.11.1 bling or disabling non-management traffic. 4.2.6.4.12 Show Bridge Parameters rrent values of the Bridge 4.2.6.5 ormance Parameters menu includes the following parameters:  y) The Ports Control sub-menu includes the Ethernet Port Control option: Ethernet Port Control The Ethernet Port Control option allows enatraffic to/from the Ethernet port. When changed to Disable, all current data sessions will be terminated. The unit is still manageable via the Ethernet port even if it is disabled for dataThe default selection is Enable. The Show Bridge Parameters option displays the cuparameters. Performance Parameters The Performance Parameters menu enables defining a series of parameters that control the method by which traffic is transmitted through the wireless access network. The Perf RTS Threshold Minimum Contention Window  Maximum Contention Window  Multicast Modulation Level (AU onl Maximum Modulation Level  Average SNR Memory Factor  Number of HW Retries  Burst Mode  Adaptive Modulation Algorithm BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 124
Menus and Parameters 4.2.6.5.1 res an eless link lue larger ndshake for frames ansmitted by this unit. ailable values range from 20 to 4032 bytes. ed that these values be used to ensure that RTS/CTS is never used in 4.2.6.5.2 ter determines the time that a unit re no detectable transmissions y other units until it attempts to transmit. The BreezeACCESS 4900 system es a special mechanism based on detecting the presence of a carrier signal and analyzing the information contained in the transmissions of the AU to estimate the activity of other SUs served by the AU. The target is to minimize collisions in the wireless medium resulting from attempts of more than one unit to transmit at the same time. The system uses an exponential Back-off algorithm to resolve contention between several units that want to access the wireless medium. The method requires each station to choose a random number N between 0 and a given number C each time it wants to access the medium. The unit will attempt to access the medium only after a time equal to DIFS (for more details refer to section 4.2.6.2.10 RTS Threshold The RTS Threshold parameter defines the minimum frame size that requiRTS/CTS (Request To Send/Clear To Send) handshake. Frames whose size is smaller than the RTS Threshold value are transmitted directly to the wirwithout being preceded with RTS frames. Setting this parameter to a vathan the maximum frame size eliminates the RTS/CTS hatrThe avThe default value is 60 bytes for SUs. For AUs the default is 4032. It is recommendthe AU. Minimum Contention Window The Minimum Contention Window paramewaits from the time it has concluded that there abus) plus N time slots, always checking if a different unit has accessed the medium before. Each time the unit tries to transmit and a collision occurs; the maximum number C used for the random number selection will be increased to the next available value. The available values are 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511 and 1023. The Minimum Contention Window parameter is the first maximum number C used in the back-off algorithm. The higher the number of SUs served by the same AU, the higher the Minimum Contention Window for each SU should be. The available values are 0, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511 and 1023. A value of 0 means that the contention window algorithm is not used and that the unit will attempt to access the medium immediately after a time equal to DIFS. The default value is 15. Operation and Administration 125
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration CAUTION A value o y be used in point-to-f 0 disables the contention window back-off algorithm. It should onlpoint app lications. For more details on configuring units in a point-to-point link refer to section 4.2.6.2.10. 4.2.6.5.3 Maximum Contention Winximum Contention Window parameter defines the upper limit for the ber C used in the b ff algorithm as described in Minimum Contention Window above. The available values are 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511 and 1023. The default value is 1023. 4.2.6.5.4 Multicast Modulation Level (AU only) The Multicast Modulation Level parameter defines the modulation level used for multicast and broadcast data frames. Multicast and broadcast s are not acknowledg ; therefore if a multicast or broadcast rly received there is no possibility of retransmitting. It is recommended that you set a lower modulation level for broadcast and multicast bability that they are received without errors. 4.2.6.5.5 e Modulation Algorithm (see section 4.2.6.5.9 dow The Mamaximum num ack-otransmittingtransmissiontransmission is not propeedframe transmissions to increase the proThe Multicast Modulation Level parameter is applicable only to data frames. Beacons and other wireless management and control frames are always transmitted at the lowest modulation level, modulation level 1. The range is from 1 to 8. The default is 1 (the lowest modulation level). Maximum Modulation Level When the Adaptiv ) is enabled, it ynamically according to link conditions. The ability of using the maximum possible modulation der conditions, a higher Maximum Modulation Level increases the number or is being reduced by the Adaptive high number of retransmissions reduces the overall throughput of the applicable SU as well as all other SUs associated with the same AU. changes the modulation level dpurpose is to increase the problevel at any given moment. Although the algorithm will avoid using modulation levels that are too high for the prevailing link conditions, it might be better uncertain conditions to limit the use of higher modulation levels. If the link quality is not sufficient, it is recommended that the maximum modulation level be decreased, as higher modulation levels increase the error rate. In such retransmissions before the modulation level Modulation Algorithm. A BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 126
Menus and Parameters The link quality can be estimated based on the SNR measurement of the SU at the AU, which can be viewed in the MAC Address Database option in the Site sible or variance in the link quality. Survey menu. If the measured SNR is less than a certain threshold, it is recommended that the maximum modulation level of the SU be decreased in accordance with Table 4-10, using the values of typical sensitivity. It is recommended to add a 2 dB safety margin to compensate for posmeasurement inaccuracy NOTE The SNR measurement at the AU is accurate only when receiving transmissions from the applicable SU. If necessary, use the Ping Test utility in the Site Survey menu to verify data transmission. When the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm is disabled, this parameter will serve to determine Fixed Modulation Level used for transmissions. The range is from 1 to 8. The default is 8 (the highest modulation level). Operation and Administration 127
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration Table 4-10: Recommended Maximum Modulation Level SNR Maximum Modulation Level SNR > 23 dB 8 21 dB 7 < SNR < 23 dB 16 dB < SNR < 21 dB 6 13 dB < SNR < 16 dB 5 10 dB < SNR < 13 dB 4 8 dB < SNR < 10 dB 3 7 dB < SNR < 8 dB 2 6 dB < SNR < 7 dB 1 4.2.6.5.6 m in on . The higher the value of this s the weight of history in the formula. weight for history, meaning that average 4.2.6.5.7 Average SNR Memory Factor The Average SNR Memory Factor defines the weight of history (value of last calculated average SNR) in the formula used for calculating the current average SNR for received data frames. This average SNR is used by the ATPC algoriththe AU and is also included in the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm informatimessages transmitted by the AU and the SUparameter, the higher iAvailable values: -1 to 32. -1 is for noSNR equals the last measured SNR. Default value: 5 Number of HW Retries The Number of HW Retries parameter defines the maximum number of times thatan unacknowledged packet is retransmitted. When the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm is disabled, a frame will be dropped when the number of unsuccessful retransmissions reaches this value. For details on the effect of this parameter when the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm is enabled, refer to section 4.2.6.5.9 . The available values range is from 1 to 15. The default value is 10. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 128
Menus and Parameters 4.2.6.5.8 erhead associated with transmissions in the wireless medium. In a burst transmission n broadcasts/multicasts). 4.2.6.5.8.1 The Bur Option enables or disables the Burst Mode operation. The4.2.6.5.8.2 Burst Mode Time Interval The Bu defines the burst size, which is the time in which data frames are sent immediately without contending for the wireless medium. The4.2.6.5.9 Adaptive Modulation Algorithm (Multi Rate) The Adtransmitted data to the prevailing conditions of the applicable radio link. The algorithm provides Access Units with simultaneous, adaptive support for multiple Sulevel dLink qswitchusing tany givhe decisions made by the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm for the modulation be used are based on multiple parameters, including information on cision algorithm is performed mission mechanism operates as follows: modulation level selected by the Adaptive Modulation algorithm. the frame will be retransmitted at the e maximum number of retransmission arameters: Burst Mode Burst mode provides an increased throughput by reducing the ovthe inter-frame spacing is reduced and unicast data frames are transmitted without any contention period (burst mode is not activated ooBurst Mode Option st Mode default is Enable. rst Mode Time Interval range is from 1 to 10 milliseconds. The default is 5 milliseconds. aptive Modulation Algorithm enables adapting the modulation level of bscriber Units at different modulation levels, as transmission’s modulation ecisions are made separately for each associated SU. uality fluctuates due to various environmental conditions. Dynamically ing between the possible modulation levels increases the probability of he maximum modulation level suitable for the current radio link quality at en moment. Tlevel toreceived signal quality (SNR) that is received periodically from the destination unit, the time that has passed since last transmission to the relevant unit, and the recent history of successful and unsuccessful transmissions/retransmissions. In the AU the deseparately for each SU. The transmission/retrans1 Each new frame (first transmission attempt) will be transmitted at a 2 If first transmission trial has failed, same modulation level up to thattempts defined by the Number of HW Retries parameter. The Adaptive Modulation Parameters menu includes the following pOperation and Administration 129
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration 4.2.6.5.9.1 Option enables or disables the Adaptive Modulation ed, the algorithm supports decrease/increase of between the lowest possible level (Modulation meter. If possible level, the Adaptive Modulation algorithm has no effect. The default selection is Enable. 4.2.6.5.9.2 Modulation Messages n Adaptive Modulation Messages sets the minimum interval between two consecutive adaptive modulation messages, carrying f received signals. The messages in the AU include SNR information on all the SUs associated with it. 4.2.6.5.9.3 th a low SNR (below 13), the Adaptive vel when ay try to use s too high, resulting in a relatively large number of The default is Normal. 4.2.6.5.10 Concate s data frames into a single frame for transmission to the wireless link. This feature improves throughput and con applicable, and a single waiting period according to the contention window mechanism before transmission. When acc before the concatenated frame is transmitted to the wireless medium. Up to 8 data frames can be accumulated, to a maximum total size of enation process is performed separately for each Adaptive Modulation Option The Adaptive Modulationdecision algorithm. When enabltransmission’s modulation levelsLevel 1) to the value configured for the Maximum Modulation Level parathe Maximum Modulation Level is set at the lowestMinimum Interval Between Adaptive The Minimum Interval Betweeinformation on the SNR oThe available range is from 1 to 3600 seconds. The default is 4 seconds. Adaptive Modulation Decision Thresholds Enables selection between Normal and High decision thresholds for the Adaptive Modulation algorithm. In links wiModulation algorithm may not stabilize on the correct modulation leusing the standard decision thresholds. In this case the algorithm ma modulation level that idropped frames. The “High” option solves this limitation and ensures good performance also in links with a low SNR. nation ParameterThe Concatenation mechanism enables bundling several reduces the overhead in the wireless medium, by requiring only one CRC for each catenated frame, one RTS/CTS cycle ifconcatenation is enabled, data packets in the queue of the internal bridge can be umulated 4032 bytes. In the AU, the concatdestination SU. A frame is a candidate for bundling into a concatenated frame if all the following conditions are met: BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 130
Menus and Parameters  The frame is a data frame  The destination is an entity behind the destination AU/SU. When a frame is identified as an eligible candidate for concatenation, it is markedaccordingly and will be processed according to the following: in y – the frame is transmitted immediately. not empty) – the frame is inserted to the queue as a concatenated frame. in the allowed concatenated frame size – both frames are transmitted as two separate  Otherwise (the combined frames size is below the maximum size) – the ncatenated frame will be transmitted to the wireless medium. Otherwise mains in the queue (until the hardware queue becomes free).  If there is no concatenated frame designated to the same destination unitthe queue:  If the hardware queue is empt Otherwise (the queue is If a concatenated frame designated to the same destination unit existsqueue:  If the combined size of both frames is above the maximumframes. new frame is added to the concatenated frame. If the number of data frames in the concatenated frame has reached the maximum allowed – theco– the concatenated frame re NOTE When a frame is marked as a candidate for concatenation, it will be transmitted as a concatenated frame. If it is not bundled with another data frame before transmission, it will be a concatenated frame with a single data frame (Concatenated Frame Single). If it is bundled with two or more data frames, it will be a concatenated frame with either double data frames (Concatenated Frame Double) or more data frames (Concatenated Frame More). The Concatenation Parameters submenu includes: 4.2.6.5.10.1 4.2.6.5.10.2 Concatenation Option The Concatenation Option enables or disables the concatenation mechanism. The default is Enable. Maximum Number of Frames The Maximum Number of Frames parameter defines the maximum number of data frames that can be bundled into a single concatenated frame. Operation and Administration 131
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration The range is from 2 to 8 frames. The default is 8 frames. 4.2.6.6 enu enables defining user filtering, MIR/CIR 4.2.6.6.1 ining the IP addresses of user security and/or control be used to enable the transmission and reception of specific protocol frames. These filtering options do not affect management frames eters menu provides the following options: 4.2.6.6.1.1 User Filtering Option feature. The following options are available: y - only IP frames from/to IP addresses included in the User Filter Addresses list pass. type 0x8863 and Disable. 4.2.6.6.1.2 The Set/Change Filter IP Address Ranges option enables defining/updating up to 8 IP address ranges to/from which IP frames are to pass if the User Defined Addresses Only option is selected in the User Filtering Option parameter. Service Parameters The Service Parameters mparameters, and traffic prioritization parameters. The Service Parameters menu includes the following parameters:  User Filtering Parameters (SU only)  MIR and CIR Parameters  Traffic Prioritization User Filtering Parameters (SU only) The User Filtering Parameters submenu enables defdevices authorized to access the wireless medium forpurposes. In addition, it cansent to or generated by the unit. The User Filtering ParamThe User Filtering Option disables or enables the User Filtering Disable - no filtering.  IP Protocol Only - only IP Protocol packets pass.  User Defined Addresses Onl PPPoE Protocol Only - only PPPoE messages pass (Ethernet0x8864). The default selection isSet/Change Filter IP Address Range BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 132
Menus and Parameters The default Filter IP Address Range is 0.0.0.0 TO 0.0.0.0 (all 8 ranges). ple: 192.168.1.1 in the format “<base address> 255.255.0). 4.2.6.6.1.3 ss Range m the Filter IP Address Ranges list. 4.2.6.6.1.5 er. The DHCP Unicast to overcome this problem. When enabled, unicast DHCP messages pass, overriding the user filtering mechanism. 4.2.6.6.1.6 f the 4.2.6.6.2 ecifies the minimum data rate e MIR (Maximum Information Rate) ailable for burst transmissions, mand in over-subscribed cells. When this an the CIR. ging the information rate in such cases can result in an unfair allocation of resources, as subscribers with a higher CIR actually A range can be defined using a string that includes either a start and end address, in the format “<start address> to <end address>” (examto 192.168.1.255), or a base address and a mask,mask <mask>” (example: 192.168.1.1 mask 255.Delete Filter IP AddreThe Delete Filter IP Address Range option enables deleting IP address range entries fro4.2.6.6.1.4 Delete All User Filtering Entries The Delete All User Filtering Entries option enables deleting all entries from the Filter IP Address Ranges list. DHCP Unicast Override Filter When user filtering is activated, unicast DHCP messages are filtered out; therefore the unit cannot communicate with the DHCP servOverride Filter option enablesThe default is Disable DHCP Unicast. Show User Filtering Parameters The Show All User Filtering Parameters option displays the current value oUser Filtering Option and the list of User Filtering addresses, subnet masks and ranges. MIR and CIR Parameters The CIR (Committed Information Rate) spguaranteed to the relevant subscriber. Thvalue specifies the maximum data rate avprovided such bandwidth is available. Under normal conditions, the actual Information Rate (IR) is between the applicable CIR and MIR values, based on the following formula: IR=CIR+K(MIR - CIR). In this formula K is between 0 and 1 and is determined dynamically by the AU according to overall demand in the cell and the prevailing conditions that influence the performance of the wireless link. In some situations the minimum rate (CIR) cannot be provided. This may result from high demand and poor wireless link conditions and/or high deoccurs, the actual information rate is lower thThe simple solution for manaOperation and Administration 133
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration receive an IR lower than the CIR designated for subscribers in a lower CIR y. If no data is received from the Ethernet port during the last N seconds, the unit is allowed to transmit N out any delay. For example, after a period of inactivity of 128 Kbps can transmit up to 128 Kbits x 0.5 = 64 Kbits without any delay. 4.2.6.6.2.1 MIR: n Rate of the downlink from the AU to the SU. The 4.2.6.6.2.2 Information Rate of the up-link from the SU to the AU. The MIR value cannot be lower than the corresponding CIR value. 8 Kbps. 4.2.6.6.2.3 The o 45056 Kbps. 8 bracket. A special algorithm for graceful degradation is incorporated into the AU, ensuringthat the degradation of performance for each individual Subscriber Unit is proportional to its CIR. The MIR/CIR algorithm uses buffers to control the flow of data. To balance the performance over time, a special Burst Duration algorithm is employed to enable higher transmission rates after a period of inactivittimes its CIR value with0.5 seconds, a unit with CIR = Downlink (SU only) Sets the Maximum InformatioMIR value cannot be lower than the corresponding CIR value. Available values range is from 128 to 53888 Kbps. The default is 53888 Kbps. The actual value will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128 (N*128). MIR: Uplink (SU only) Sets the MaximumAvailable values range is from 128 to 5388The default is 53888 Kbps. The actual value will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128 (N*128). CIR: Downlink (SU only) Sets the Committed Information Rate of the downlink from the AU to the SU. CIR value cannot be higher than the corresponding MIR value. Available values range is from 0 tThe default is 0 Kbps. The actual value will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 12(N*128). BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 134
Menus and Parameters 4.2.6.6.2.4 esponding MIR value. from 0 to 45056 Kbps. (SU and AU) Available values range from 0 to 2000 (milliseconds). The value is 5 (milliseconds), enabling a maximum burst of (0.005 X CIR) or more. 4.2.6.6.2.6 Maximum Delay (SU only) ers system. As certain applications latively high delays are permitted, these from poor performance due to data accumulation in the as FTP. The Maximum Delay parameter 4.2.6.6.2.7 Graceful Degradation Limit (AU only) used as long as e Graceful Degradation Limit. Beyond this point the simple CIR: Uplink (SU only) Sets the Committed Information Rate of the uplink from the SU to the AU. The CIR value cannot be higher than the corrAvailable values range isThe default is 0 Kbps. The actual value will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128 (N*128). 4.2.6.6.2.5 Maximum Burst Duration Sets the maximum time for accumulating burst transmission rights according to the Burst Duration algorithm. default Kbps after a period of inactivity of 5 milliseconds Sets the maximum permitted delay in the buffare very sensitive to delay, if reapplications may sufferbuffers from other applications, such limits the number of available buffers. Data that is delayed more than the permitted maximum delay is discarded. If the SU supports applications that are very sensitive to delay, the value of the Maximum Delay should be decreased. Valid values range from 300 to 10000 (milliseconds). The default value is 5000 (milliseconds). Sets the limit on using the graceful degradation algorithm. In cases of over demand, the performance of all SUs is degraded proportionally to their CIR (IR=(100%-k%) x CIR). The graceful degradation algorithm isk ≤ K, where K is th“brute force” algorithm is used. The Graceful Degradation Limit should be raised in proportion to the demand in the cell. The higher the expected demand in a cell,the higher the value of the Graceful Degradation Limit. Higher demand can be expected in cases of significant over subscription and/or in deployments whehigh number of subscribers are in locations without proper communication withe AU at the highest data rate. re a th The default value is 70 (%). The available values range from 0 to 70 (%). Operation and Administration 135
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration 4.2.6.6.2.8 algorithm to use ines the actual information rate on r value. When enabled, the graceful degradation algorithm, which is . 4.2.6.6.2.9 current values of the MIR and CIR parameters. 4.2.6.6.3 Traffic Each packet that is received from the Ethernet port is placed in either the High or the Traffic Prioritization parameters. When the MIR/CIR mechanism decides that a packet must be sent, the High priority queue will be ueue is not empty, the first element in the queue is forwarded to the MIR/CIR mechanism. Packets from the Low priority only if the High queue is empty. he packets is done using different classifiers: more than one classifier is activated, the priority of each packet will be determined by the Thecla4.2.6.6.3.1 VLTheenafielpar field is low e Low queue (unless it is assigned a High priority by another classifier). MIR Only Option (AU only) When the MIR Only Option is enabled, it forces the MIR/CIRMIR values only. The MIR/CIR algorithm determfor each of the supported SUs under changing conditions of demand, based the configured CIR and MIR values. When the MIR Only Option is enabled, the MIR/CIR algorithm is overridden and forced to operate with MIR values only. Foexample, the AU attempts to enable all SUs to transmit/receive information at thespecified MIRa part of the CIR/MIR algorithm, is also disabledThe default is Enable. Show MIR/CIR Parameters Displays thePrioritization Low queue, according to checked first. If the High priority qqueue will be forwardedThe prioritization of t VLAN Priority  ToS Priority: IP Precedence or DSCP  UDP and/or TCP ports Each one of these classifiers can be activated/deactivated. Ifhighest priority given to it by the active classifiers. Traffic Prioritization menu enables activating/deactivating each of these ssifiers, and configuring the applicable parameters for each classifier. AN Priority Threshold VLAN Priority Threshold is applicable for Trunk and Hybrid Links only. It bles defining the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold. If the VLAN Priority d in a tagged frame is higher than the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold ameter, the packet will be routed to the High queue. If the VLAN Priorityer than or equal to this value, the packet will be transferred to th BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 136
Menus and Parameters ValTheto disa sifier). 4.2.6.6.3.2 ToThe parameters enable defining prioritization in accordance with either the 3 IP Precedence bits in the IP header in accordance with RFC 791, or t ferentiated Services Code Point) bits in accordance with RFC 2474. The ToS Prioritization menu includes the following parameters: 4.2.6.6.3.2.1 Tor d  The4.2.6.6.3.2.2 IP The when the ToS Prioritization Option is set to Enable IP Precedence (RFC791) Prioritization. If the value of the 3 is rou n or equal to this threshold, the packet will be transferred to the Low queue (unless it is assigned a High priority Valhich means that all packets get a low priority (equivalent 4.2.6.6.3.2.3tion n or equal to this threshold, the packet will be y by another classifier). id values range from 0 to 7. default value is 7, which means that all packets get a low priority (equivalent bling the VLAN-based clasS Prioritization ToS Prioritizationhe 6 DSCP (DifoS Prioritization Option The ToS Prioritization Option defines whether ToS-based prioritization is enabled isabled. The following options are available: Disable Enable IP Precedence (RFC791) Prioritization  Enable DSCP (RFC2474) Prioritization default is Disable. Precedence Threshold IP Precedence Threshold parameter is applicableIP Precedence bits in the IP header is higher than this threshold, the packetted to the High queue. If the value is lower thaby another classifier). id values range from 0 to 7. The default value is 7, wto disabling the IP Precedence-based classifier). DSCP Threshold The DSCP Threshold parameter is applicable when the ToS Prioritization Opis set to Enable DSCP (RFC2474) Prioritization. If the value of the 6 DSCP bits in the IP header is higher than this threshold, the packet is routed to the Highqueue. If the value is lower tharouted to the Low queue (unless it is assigned a High prioritValid values range from 0 to 63. Operation and Administration 137
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration The(eq4.2.6.6.3.3 UDP/TCP Port Ranges Traffic Prioritization Thepri es. The following parameters: 4.2.6.6.3.3.1 UDThe s Prioritization Option defines whether port ranges bas or disabled. The following options are available:   r UDP  The4.2.6.6.3.3.2 UDThe UDP Port Ranges menu enables defining port ranges to be used as priority cla ion Option is set to either Enable Only for UDP or Enable for both UDP and TCP. All packets whose pacpriThe ransported using Real Time rol Protocol (RTCP) is used to control the ys an even number, and the port with g it will be assigned to RTCP. ackets, then all the bered destination port will always have Low priority. number for destination port will receive High default value is 63, which means that all packets get a low priority uivalent to disabling the IP Precedence-based classifier). UDP/TCP Port Ranges Traffic Prioritization parameters enable defining oritization in accordance with the UDP and/or TCP destination port rang UDP/TCP Port Ranges Traffic Prioritization menu includes the P/TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option UDP/TCP Port Rangeed prioritization is enabledDisable Enable Only foEnable Only for TCP  Enable for both UDP and TCP default is Disable. P Port Ranges ssifiers when the UDP/TCP Port Ranges Prioritizatdestination is included in the list will be routed to the High queue. All other kets will be routed to the Low queue (unless they were assigned a High ority by another classifier). UDP Port Ranges menu includes the following options: UDP RTP/RTCP Prioritization: Voice over IP is tProtocol (RTP). The Real Time ContRTP. When an application uses RTP/RTCP, it chooses for destination ports consecutive numbers: RTP port is alwathe odd number followinIf the administrator selects to prioritize only the RTP ppackets with an odd numThe packets with an evenpriority, if the port number is included in the specified ranges. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 138
Menus and Parameters If the administrator selects to prioritize both RTP and RTCP packets, then all packets whose destination port number is included is in the specified ranges  RTP Only Th Add UDP Port Ranges: This option enables adding UDP port ranges to the list to For example: 8900,9000-9005,9010,9016-9017.  s nges. In ranges, a hyphen is used to separate start and end port numbers. A comma is used to separate entries.  Delete All UDP Port Ranges: This option enables deleting all UDP port  Show UDP Port Ranges: Select this option to view the current UDP tion and the list of UDP Port Ranges. 4.2.6.6.3.3.3es menu enables defining port ranges to be used as priority classifiers when the UDP/TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option is set to either able for both UDP and TCP. All packets whose destination is included in the list will be routed to the High queue. All other eue (unless they were assigned a High priority by another classifier). enu includes the following options: ver IP is transported using Real Time Protocol (RTP). The Real Time Control Protocol (RTCP) is used to control the RTP. When an application uses RTP/RTCP, it chooses for destination ports will receive High priority. The available options are:  RTP & RTCP e default is RTP & RTCP of priority port numbers. The list can include up to 64 ranges. It is possibleadd discrete port numbers and/or ranges. In ranges, a hyphen is used to separate start and end port numbers. A comma is used to separate entries. Delete UDP Port Ranges: This option enables deleting UDP port ranges fromthe list of priority port numbers. It is possible to delete discrete port numberand/or raFor example: 8900,9000-9005,9010,9016-9017. ranges from the list of priority port numbers. RTP/RTCP Prioritization op TCP Port Ranges The TCP Port RangEnable Only for TCP or Enpackets will be routed to the Low quThe TCP Port Ranges m TCP RTP/RTCP Prioritization: Voice oOperation and Administration 139
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration consecutive numbers: RTP port is always an even number, and the port with the odd number following it will be assigned to RTCP. P packets, then all the red destination port will always have Low priority. If the administrator selects to prioritize both RTP and RTCP packets, then all RTCP The list can include up to 64 ranges. It is possible to d/or ranges. In ranges, a hyphen is used to separate between start and end port numbers. A comma is used to separate Delete TCP Port Ranges: This option enables deleting TCP port ranges from of priority port numbers. It is possible to delete discrete port numbers and/or ranges. In ranges, a hyphen is used to separate between start and end  s from the list of priority port numbers. P/RTCP 4.2.6.6.3.4 alues of the Traffic Prioritization parameters, including the lists of UDP and TCP priority port ranges. If the administrator selects to prioritize only the RTpackets with an odd numbeThe packets with an even number for destination port will receive High priority, if the port number is included in the specified ranges. packets whose destination port number is included in the specified ranges will receive High priority. The available options are:  RTP & RTP Only The default is RTP & RTCP  Add TCP Port Ranges: This option enables adding TCP port ranges to the list of priority port numbers.add discrete port numbers anbetween entries. For example: 8900,9000-9005,9010,9016-9017. the listport numbers. A comma is used to separate between entries. For example: 8900,9000-9005,9010,9016-9017. Delete All TCP Port Ranges: This option enables deleting all TCP port range Show TCP Port Ranges: Select this option to view the current TCP RTPrioritization option and the list of TCP Port Ranges. Show Traffic Prioritization Displays the current v BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 140
Menus and Parameters 4.2.6.6.4 Show Service Parameters iltering 4.2.6.7 hentication messages ee encryption standards: lent Privacy algorithm. WEP is defined in the IEEE sed on the RSA’s RC4 encryption y the National ogy (NIST) and is based on Rijndael block ok) is a mode that operates by augmenting n process by incorporating an offset value. ncryption Standard. AES is defined by the National integrity in one Displays the current values of the Service Parameters, including the user fparameters and MIR and CIR parameters. Security Parameters BreezeACCESS 4900 systems can support encryption of autand/or data frames using one of thr WEP Wireless Equiva802.11 Wireless LAN standard and is baalgorithm.  AES/OCB Advanced Encryption Standard. AES is defined bInstitute of Standards and Technolcipher. AES/OCB (Offset Code Bothe normal encryptio AES/CCM Advanced EInstitute of Standards and Technology (NIST) and is based on Rijndael block cipher. AES/CCM mode provides encryption and message solution. NOTE The AES/CCM encryption functionality in BreezeACCESS 4900 is FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standards) 197 certified. The following parameters are available through the Security Parameters menu (in certain units some or all of the security options may not be available): miscuous Authentication (AU only)  Authentication Algorithm  Data Encryption Option  Security Mode  Default Key (SU only)  Default Multicast Key (AU only)  Key # 1 to Key # 4  ProOperation and Administration 141
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration 4.2.6.7.1 Authentication Algorithm The Authentication Algorithm option determines the operation mode of the selected unit. The following two options are available:  Open System: An SU configured to Open System can only associate with an AU also configured to Open System. In this case, the authentication encryption algorithm is not used.  Shared Key: The authentication messages are encrypted. An SU configured to use a Shared Key can only be authenticated by an AU configured to use a Shared Key, provided the applicable Key (which means both the key number and its content) in the AU is identical to the key selected as the Default Key in the SU. The default is Open System. NOTE The Shared Key option cannot be selected before at least one Key is defined. In the SU, a Default Key that refers to a valid Key must be selected. The AU and all the SUs it serves should be configured to the same Authentication Algorithm option. Mixed operation is not supported. 4.2.6.7.2 Data Encryption Option The Data Encryption Option allows enabling or disabling data encryption. When enabled, all data frames, including frames using management protocols such as Telnet, FTP, TFTP, SNMP, DHCP and ICMP, are encrypted. The default is Disable. NOTE  The AU and all the SUs it serves should be configured to the same Data Encryption Option. Mixed operation is not supported.  An SU with Data Encryption Option enabled can accept non-encrypted data frames.  When the Data Encryption Option is enabled, the maximum number of SUs that can associate with the AU is limited to 124. The Maximum Number of Associations Limit is indicated in the Show Air Interface Parameters display. 4.2.6.7.3 Security Mode The Security Mode option enables selecting the algorithm to be used for encrypting the authentication messages and/or data frames. Available options are WEP, AES/OCB and AES/CCM. The default is WEP. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 142
Menus and Parameters 4.2.6.7.4 Default Key (SU only) The Default Key defines the Key to be used for encrypting/decrypting tauthentication messages (Shared Key mode) and/or data frames (DataEncryption enabled). The AU learns the Default Key from the SU provione of the Keys defined in the AU. The AU may use different keys whenauthenticating and/or communicating with different SUs. Available values range from 1 to 4. The default is KEY # 1. 4.2.6.7.5 Default Multicast Key (AU only) rypting es range from 1 to 4. The default is KEY # 1. 4.2.6.7.6 Key # 1 to Key # 4 The Key # options enables defining the encryption key to be used for initializing the pseudo-random number generator that forms part of the encryption/decryption process. The Keys must be set before the Shared Key authentication algorithm or Data Encryption can be used. To support proper operation, both the Key # and the content must be identical at both sides of a wireless link. Each Key is a string of 32 hexadecimal numbers. For security reasons, it is a “write only” parameter, displayed as a string of asterisks (“*”). The default for all 4 Keys is 000…0 (a string of 32 zeros), which means no key. 4.2.6.7.7 Promiscuous Authentication (AU only) The Promiscuous Authentication mode enables new SUs to join an active cell where Shared Key operation and/or Data Encryption are used, even if this SU does not have the correct security parameters. In promiscuous mode, all downlink transmissions (from AU to SUs) are not encrypted, allowing remote configuration of security parameters, regardless of the current settings in the SUs of the parameters related to data encryption. After a new SU joins the cell it should be remotely configured with the proper parameters (or upgraded). When the SU is configured properly, the Promiscuous Mode should be disabled. The default is Disable. he ded it is The Multicast Default Key defines the Key to be used for encrypting/decmulticasts and broadcasts when Data Encryption is enabled. Available valuNOTE Do not leave the AU in the enabled Promiscuous Authentication mode for prolonged periods. Use it only when absolutely necessary, perform the required actions as quickly as possible and disable it. The unit will return automatically to Promiscuous Authentication disabled mode after reset. Operation and Administration 143
AA Appendix A - Software Version Loading Using TFTP
Appendix A - Software Version Loading Using TFTP Firmware upgrades to the unit's FLASH memory can be performed by a simple loading procedure using a TFTP application. Before performing an upgrade procedure, be sure you have the correct files and most recent instructions. Upgrade packages can be obtained from the Technical Support section of Alvarion's web site, http://www.alvarion.com/. CAUTION Shutting down power to the unit before completion of the loading procedure may cause the unit to be inoperable. To load software versions: 1 Verify that IP connectivity to the required unit is established. 2 Ensure that the IP address of the PC from which the upgrade is to be performed belongs to the same subnet as the unit to be upgraded, unless the unit is behind a router. If the unit is behind a router, verify that the unit is configured with the correct Default Gateway Address. 3 To view the current IP parameters of the unit, use the Monitor program by connecting the PC to the unit either directly or via Telnet. To access the IP parameters via the Monitor program: a From the Main Menu select 1 - Info Screens. b From the Info Screen menu select 2 - Show Basic Configuration. The current basic configuration is displayed, including the run time values for the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway Address parameters. 4 To modify any of the IP parameters: a From the Main Menu, select 3 - Basic Configuration. b To configure the IP address, select: 1 - IP Address. c To configure the subnet mask, select 2 - Subnet Mask. d To configure the default gateway address, select 3 - Default Gateway Address. 5 To verify the connection, PING the unit's IP address and verify that PING replies are being received. 6 Use the TFTP utility, with the following syntax, to perform the upgrade: tftp -i hostaddress put sourcefile [destinationfile] where -i is for binary mode and hostaddress is the IP address of the unit to be upgraded. put causes the PC client to send a file to the hostaddress. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 146
Software Version Loading Using TFTP 7 The original sourcefile name of SW files is in the structure uX_Y_Z.bz, where u is the unit type (a for AU, s for SU) and X.Y.Z is the version numbe8 destinationfile is the name of the file to be loaded. Use the SNMP wcommunity <SnmpWriteCommunity>.bz to define the destination fThe default SNMP write community is private. For example, to loadupgrade file a1_0_6.bz to an AU whose IP address is 206.25.63.65:206.25.63.65 put a1_0_6.bz private.bz 9 When the loading is complete, the following message is displayed, indicating completion of the TFTP process: Download operation has been completed successfully new e new version replaces the previous shadow version only after . If verification tests fail, the loaded version will be rejected. Among other things that are tested, the unit will reject a file if either the file name or the version number matches the current Main versions. The unit will also reject a file designated for a different unit type, e.g. an AU upgrade file with the prefix a in the original file name will not be accepted by SUs. 11 The FLASH memory can store two software versions. One version is called Current and the second version is called Shadow. The new version is loaded into the Shadow (backup) FLASH memory. To check that the new firmware was properly downloaded and verified, view the firmware versions stored in the FLASH, as follows: a From the Main Menu, select 2 - Unit Control. b From the Unit Control menu, select 5 - Flash Memory Control. c From the Flash Memory Control menu, select S - Show Flash Versions. The following information is displayed: Flash Versions ============ Running from :Main Version Main Version File Name :1_0_5.bz Main Version Number :1.0.5 Shadow Version File Name :1_0_6.bz File Name Number :1.0.6 r. rite ilename. the tftp -i 10 The unit decompresses the loaded file and checks the integrity of theversion. ThverificationBreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 147
BB Appendix B - File Download and Upload Using TFTP
Appendix B - File Download and Upload Using TFTP The File Download/Upload feature simplifies the task of remotely configuring a large number of units using TFTP protocol. By downloading the configuration file to a PC it is possible to view all the parameters configured for the unit, as a plain ASCII text file. It is necessary to edit the file using a simple editor and remove certain parameters or change their values prior to uploading the configuration to another unit. The file loading procedure can also be used for uploading a feature license file or an updated country code file to multiple units. When multiple configurations are being done simultaneously, that is, the file is being uploaded to several units, it is recommended that the file will include only the required parameters. In the configuration file, the following three fields represent each parameter: 1 A symbolic string similar to the name of the parameter in the Monitor program, followed by "=". 2 The value of the parameters, which uses the same values as the Monitor program. 3 An optional comment. If used, the comment should start with a ";" character. An unknown parameter will be ignored. A known parameter with a value that is invalid or out of range will be set by the unit to its default value. Use the SNMP write community string (the default is “private”) to define both the uploaded file (put) and the downloaded file (get). The file should be transferred in ASCII mode. Use the extension cfg for a configuration file. Use the extension cmr for the Operator Defaults file. Use the extension fln for a Feature License file. Use the extension ccf for a Country Code file. Feature license and country code files include multiple strings, where each string is applicable only for a certain unit identified by its MAC address. When uploading a feature license or a country code file to multiple units, each unit will accept only the parts that are applicable for itself. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 150
File Download and Upload Using TFTP Examples: 1 To upload the configuration file using a DOS based TFTP Client to whose IP address is 206.25.63.65, enter: tftp 206.25.63.65 put Suconf private.cfg 2 To download the Operator Defaults file from the same unit, enter: tftp 206.25.63.65 get private.cmr Suconf 3 To upload the Feature Upgrade file to the same unit, enter: tftp 206.25.63.65 put private.fln Suconf 4 To upload the Country Code file from to same unit, enter: an SU tftp 206.25.63.65 put private.ccf Suconf NOTE The Configuration File mechanism is common to BreezeACCESS 4900, BreezeACCESS VL and BreezeNET B product lines. The Configuration File includes also parameters that are not applicable to BreezeACCESS 4900, such as DFS parameters. Do not attempt to change the default values of these parameters. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 151
CC Appendix C - Using the Set Factory Defaults Utility
Appendix C - Using the Set Factory Defaults Utility The Set Factory Defaults utility is intended to enable management access to a ement VLAN ID and wrong management access filtering. The utility accesses the unit by sending a special packet. Access to the unit is based on its MAC address, which must be entered in the Unit MAC address field. The set unit defaults feature is only available via the Ethernet port. unit in cases where such access is not possible due to wrong or unknown configuration of certain parameters. This includes cases such as unknown Manag To set factory defaults: 1 Connect the PC with the Set Factory Defaults utility to the Ethernet port of the unit. 2 Enter the unit’s MAClick on the Set button. This utility performs the same oper n as Set Complete Factory Defaults, default factory configuration of all parameters, except to Passwords, general FTP parameters and AU’s Frequency. address. 3 Catiorestoring the BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 154
DD Appendix D - Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable
Appendix D - Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable The Indoor-to-Outdoor cable provides pin-to-pin connection on both ends. Figure D-1 shows the wire pair connections required for the Indoor-to-Outdoor cable. 123456781 + 2 4 + 5 7 + 83 + 6 Figure D-1: Ethernet Connector Pin Assignments The color codes used in cables that are supplied with crimped connectors are as listed in the following table: Cable Color Codes Wire color Pin Blue 1 Blue/white 2 Orange 3 Orange/white 6 Brown 4 Brown/white 5 Green 7 Green/white 8 BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 156
Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable Use a crimp tool for RJ-45 connectors to prepare the wires, insert them into the appropriate pins and use the crimp tool to crimp the connector. Make sthe following: 1 Remove as small a length as possible of the external jacket. Verify texternal jacket is well inside the service box to ensure good sealing. 2 Take back the shield drain wire before inserting the cable into the Rconnector, to ensure a good connection with the connector's shield after crimping. ure to do hat the J-45 BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 157
EE Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps In This Appendix: BreezeACCESS 4900 agents support the following MIBs:  MIB II (RFC1213)  BRIDGE MIB (RFC1286)  BreezeACCESS VL Private MIB (breezeAccessVLMib) The following are described in this Appendix:  System Object Identifiers, page 160  breezeAccessVLMib, page 162  Supported Traps, page 209 NOTE The BreezeAccessVLMib is used for BreezeACCESS 4900 (AU, SU), BreezeACCESS VL (AU, SU) and BreezeNET B (BU, RB) product lines. Some of the parameters are only applicable to one or two of the product lines. Generally, all parameters that are applicable to BreezeACCESS VL are also applicable to BreezeACCESS 4900 (note that in BreezeACCESS 4900 DFS is always Not Supported).
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps E.1 System Object Identifiers Object Path alvarion 94 {(iso(1) org(3) dod(6) internet(1) private(4) enterprises(1) alvarion(12394)} OID =1.3.6.1.4.1.123prod s OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.1 {alvarion 1} uctbreezeAcce sVLMib OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.1.1 {products 1} salvarionOID OID = 1.3.6. {alvarion 4} 1.4.1.12394.4brzAccessVLOID OID = 1.3.6 .4.1 {alvarionOID 1} .1.4.1.12394brzAccessVLAU OID = 1.3.6 rzAccessVLOID 1} .1.4.1.12394.4.1.1 {bbrzAccessVLSU OID = 1.3.6 zAcce.1.4.1.12394.4.1.2 {br ssVLOID 2} brzAccessVLAU-BS OID = 1.3.6 zAcce D 4} .1.4.1.12394.4.1.4 {br ssVLOIbrzAccessVLAU-SA OID = 1.3.6 Acce.1.4.1.12394.4.1.5 {brz ssVLOID 5} brzAccessVLAUS-BS OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.6 {brzAccessVLOID 6} brzAccessVLAUS-SA OID = 1.3.6 cessVLOID 7} .1.4.1.12394.4.1.7 {brzAcbrzAccessVLSU-6-1D OID = 1.3.6 ccessVLOI.1.4.1.12394.4.1.11 {brzA D 11} brzAccessVLSU-6-BD OID = 1.3.6 rzAcc.1.4.1.12394.4.1.12 {b essVLOID 12} brzAccessVLSU-24-BD OID = 1.3.6. ccessVLOI1.4.1.12394.4.1.13 {brzA D 13} brzAccessVLSU-BD OID = 1.3.6. cessVLOID 14} 1.4.1.12394.4.1.14 {brzAcbrzAccessVLSU-54-BD OID = 1.3.6. ccessVLOI } 1.4.1.12394.4.1.15 {brzA D 15brzAccessVLSU-3-1D OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.16 {brzAccessVLOID 16} brzAccessVLSU-3-4D OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.17 {brzAccessVLOID 17} brzNetB-BU-B14 OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.21 {brzAccessVLOID 21} brzNetB-BU-B28 OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.22 {brzAccessVLOID 22} BrzNetB-RB-B14 OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.31 {brzAccessVLOID 31} brzNetB-RB-B28 OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.32 {brzAccessVLOID 32} brzAccess 4900-AU-BS OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.41 {brzAccessVLOID 41} brzAccess 4900-AU-SA OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.42 {brzAccessVLOID 42} BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 160
System Object Identifiers Object Path brzAccess 4900-SU-BD OID = 1.3.6 brzAcc D 51} .1.4.1.12394.4.1.51 { essVLOIbrzAccessVLProducts OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.3 {brzAccessVLOID 3} BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 161
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps E.2 breezeAccessVLMib = 1.3. OBJECT IDENTIFIER 6.1.4.1.12394.1.1 NOTE An * is used instead of the brzaccVL prefix. E.2 a ete .1 System Inform tion Param rs MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *SysInfo Information (breezeAccessVLMib 1) SystemParameters *Un (*SysInfo 1) itHwVersion units. DisplayString (SIZE(0..32)) Applicable to all Read-only: Hardware platform version. *RunningSoftwareVe(*SysInfo 2) rsion Applicable to all units. Read-only: Running software version. DisplayString (SIZE(0..32)) *RunningFrom l units. y Integer shadowVersion (2) (*SysInfo 3) Applicable to alRead-only: The memor(main or shadow) from which the current versionis running from. mainVersion (1) *MainVersionNumber re DisplayString (SIZE(0..32)) (*SysInfo 4) Applicable to all units. Read only: Main softwaversion number. *MainVersionFileName (*SysInfo 5) ..32)) Applicable to all units. Read-only: Main softwareversion file name. DisplayString (SIZE(0*ShadowVersionNumber (*SysInfo 6) re version number. ng (SIZE(0..32)) Applicable to all units. Read-only: Shadow softwaDisplayStri*ShadowVersionFileName (*SysInfo 7) Applicable to all units. Read-only: Shadow software version file name. ng (SIZE(0..32)) DisplayStri*UnitMacAddress Applicable to all units. are (*SysInfo 8) Read-only: Unit hardwMAC address. MAC address BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 162
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *UnitType (*SysInfo 9) Applicable to all units. Read-only: Unit type. Integer auBS (1) auSA (2) su-6-BDsu-24-BD (4) (3) ) 8) su-54-BD (11) (12) 5) su-6-1D (5) bu-B14 (6) bu-B28 (7rb-B14 (rb-B28 (9) su-BD (10) su-3-1D su-3-4D) (13) ausBS(14) ausSA(1auBS4900(16)auSA4900(17) 0(18) suBD490*AssociatedAU(*SysInfo 10) Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only: Associated AU/BU MAC address. MAC address *NumOfAssociationsSinceLastReset Info Applicable to all units. ber of st reset, including duplicate associations (re-associations). Integer (*Sys 11) Read-only: The numassociations since la*CurrentNumO(*SysInfo 13) fAssociations le to AU only. Not reezeNET B products. Read-only. The number of subscriber units Integer nApplicabapplicable to Bcurrently associated with the AU. a (65535) *UnitBootVersion 4) plicable to all units. D 32)) (*SysInfo 1 ApRead-only: The Boot software version. isplayString (SIZE(0..*RadioBand (*SysInfo 15) ll units. Integer bbbbbb -5-3GHz (6) Applicable to aRead-only: The radio band of the unit. and-5-8GHz (1) and-5-4GHz (2) and-4-9GHz (3) and-5-2GHz (4) and-2-4GHz (5) and*CurrentEthernetPortState (*SysInfo 16) ble to all units. Integer HalfDuplexAnd10Mbps (1) FullDuplexAnd10Mbps (2) HalfDuplexAnd100Mbps 3) FullDuplexAnd100Mbps (4) linkDown (5) ApplicaRead-only. The current state of the Ethernet port. *TimeSinceLastReset DisplayString (SIZE(0..32)) (*SysInfo 17) Applicable to all units. Read-only. The elapsed time since last reset. *CountryDependentParameters (*SysInfo 18) ountry Dependent Parameters C*CountryCode (*CountryDependentParameters 1) Applicable to all units. Read only. The country code and country or country group name that is supported by the unit DisplayString (SIZE(0..32)) BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 163
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *CountryDependentParamsTable endentParameters 2) nits. Not ameters. (*CountryDep Applicable to all uaccessible. A table of country dependent par*CountryDependentParameterEntry (*CountryDependentParamsTable 1) Applicable to all units. Not accessible. An entry in thecountry dependent parameters table. *CountryDependentParameterTableIdendentParameterEntry -band y. Ix 1) Applicable to all units. Read only. The subID of the entry in the Country Dependent (*CountryDepParameters table. Serves also as index for the table entrnteger *CountryDependentParameterFreque(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 2) frequencies included in the ntry. D ing nci Applicable to all units. Read only. The es applicable sub-band eisplayStr*AllowedBandwidth ntParameterEntry able to all units. pplicable the sub-band. Integer (*CountryDepende 3) Read only. The bandwidth when using the aApplic*RegulationMaxTxPowerAtAntennaPentParameterEntry . um allowed Tx power at the ing Iort 4) Applicable to all unitsRead only. The maxim(*CountryDependantenna port when usthe applicable sub-band. nteger *RegulationMaxEIRP (*CountryDependentParameterEntry ead only. The maximum -band. IA Regulation Max EIRP of 1 s no limit. 5) Applicable to all units. Rallowed EIRP when usingthe applicable subnteger 00 mean*MinModulationLevel (*CountryDependentParameterEntry 6) Applicable to all units. Read only. The minimum supported modulation level. Illllllllevel8 (8) nteger evel1 (1) evel2 (2) evel3 (3) evel4 (4) evel5 (5) evel6 (6) evel7 (7) *MaxModulationLevel entParameterEntry able to all units. on Integer level1 (1) level2 (2) llllll(*CountryDepend 7) Read only. The maximumsupported modulatiAppliclevel. evel3 (3) evel4 (4) evel5 (5) evel6 (6) evel7 (7) evel8 (8) *BurstModeSupport ntParameterEntry Isupp notSupported (2) (*CountryDepende 8) Applicable to all units. Read only. The supportedBurst Mode Option. nteger orted (1)*MaximumBurstDuration ParameterEntry y I(*CountryDependent 9) Applicable to all units. Read only. Applicable onlif Burst Mode Option is supported. The maximum supported burst duration. nteger BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 164
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *DfsSupport (*CountryDependentParameterEntry only. upported Integer supported (1) n10) Applicable to AU/BU Read only. The sDFS Option. otSupported (2) *MinimumHwRevision (*CountryDependentParameterEntry 11) Read only. The Minimum HW Revision needed to IHH (2), HnApplicable to all units. support the Sub-Band. nteger wRevisionA (1), wRevisionB wRevisionC (3), a (255) *AuthenticationEncryptionSupport (CountryDependentParameters 3) able to all units. Read only. The supported Is ted (1) n rted (2) ApplicAuthentication Encryption Option. nteger upporotSuppo*DataEncryptionSupport meters 4) Applicable to all units. upported Isupported (1) notSupported (2) (CountryDependentPara Read only. The sData Encryption Option. nteger *AESEncryptionSupport (CountryDependentParameters 5) nly. The supported Integer supported (1) nApplicable to all units. Read oAES Encryption Option. otSupported (2) *AntennaGainChange (*SysInfo 19) the Antenna Gain parameter is Isn (2) Applicable to all units. Indicates whetherchangeable or fixed. nteger upported (1) otSupported E.2.2 Unit Control Parameters MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *UnitControl (breezeAccessVLMib 2) *ResetUnit (*UnitControl 1) o all units. Resets the nit and applies new parameter values. Aupplicable t Integer cancel (1) resetSystemNow (2) *SetDefaults (*UnitControl 2) Applicable to all units. Sets unit configuration to Defaults values after the next reset. completeFactory: All parameters ters ults d tory (1) y (2) ompleteOperator (3) uest revert to Factory Defaults values partialFactory: All parameters revert to Factory Defaults values, except the parameters required for maintaining wireless connectivity. completeOperator: All parameters revert to Operator Defaults values partialOperator: All paramerevert to Operator Defavalues, except the parameters required for maintaining wireless connectivity. Integer NoDefaultSettingRequeste(0), ccompleteFaartialFactorpcpartialOperator (4) qcancelCurrentPendingRe(5) *UnitName (*UnitControl 3) Applicable to all units. The unit name. DisplayString (A string of up tSIZE(32)) o 32 printable rs. ASCII characteBreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 165
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *FlashMemoryControl Version: Activates the shadow version. Use Running Version After Reset: The currently active version will ted after next reset. From ion (1) gVersion et (2) (*UnitControl 4) Applicable to all units. Reset And Boot From Shadow become the main version and willbe activaInteger resetAndBootShadowVersuseRunninAfterRescancel (3) *TelnetLogoutTimer ) Applicable to all units. Time-out of exit if the program is (*UnitControl 5 management via Telnet. Automaticinactive for the defined time. Integer 1-999 (minutes) *SaveCurrentConfigurationAs Applicable to all units. Saves the or Integer OperatorDefaults (*UnitControl 6) current configuration as OperatDefaults. saveAsDefaults (1) cancel (2) *ExitTelnet (*UnitControl 7) le to all units. Exit the Telnet Monitor session. cancelOperation (1) Applicab Integer exit (2) *UnitPas rds Applicable to all units. Unit swo(*UnitControl 8) passwords. *ReadOnlyPassw d (*UnitPasswords 1) Applicable to all units. The User (read only) password. DisplayString (SIZE(8)). Up to 8 printable ASCII ters. orcharac*Ins(*Un ll units. The ord. yString (SIZE(8)). Up to 8 printable ASCII characters. tallerPassword itPasswords 2) Applicable to aInstaller passw Displa*Ad(*Un he password. Te SNMP Write ComString. g (SIZE(8)). able ASCII minPassword itPasswords 3) Applicable to all units. TAdministrator also th his is munity Up to 8 printcharacters. DisplayStrin*Eth nMode (*Un the Integer ce10MbpsAnd HalfDuplex (3) force100MbpsAnd FullDuplex (4) autoNegotiationMode (5) ernetNegotiatioitControl 9) Applicable to all units. Eport mode of operation. rnet forHalfDuplex (1) force10MbpsAnd FullDuplex (2) force100MbpsAnd *FTPParameters (*UnitControl 10) P Applicable to all units. FTparameters *FTPServerParams (*FT l ters. PParameters 1) Applicable to all units. GeneraFTP server parame*FT(*FT s. The user access DisplayString (SIZE(20)). ntable ASCII aracters. PServerUserName PServerParams 1) Applicable to all unitname to be used for to the Up to 18 prichFTP server *FT(*FT he used for ac DisplayString (SIZE(20)). Up to 18 printable ASCII characters. PServerPassword PServerParams 2) Applicable to all units. Te password to bthe FTP server cess to *FT(*FTPParameters 3) hetack in the IP address PClientIpAddress Applicable to all units. Taddress of the FTP sunit. IP *FT(*FT erver PServertIpaddress PServerParams 4) Applicable to all units. Thaddress of the FTP se IP IP address*FTPClientMask (*FTPParameters 5) ts. TheMASK of the FTP stack in unit. Applicable to all uni IP the IP address*FTPGatewayIPAddress (*FTPParameters 6) Applicable to all units. The FTP Default Gateway IP address. IP address BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 166
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *FT(*FT PSwDownload PParameters 2) Applicable to all units. SWdownload parameters. *FTPSwFileName (*FTPSwDownload 1) to all units. Theof the SW file to be downlo ng (SIZE(80)). Up to 20 printable ASCII characters. An empty string is t allowed. Applicable name DisplayStriaded. no*FtpSwDownloadSourceDir (*FT ) Applicable to all units. Thefile n the isplayString (SIZE(80)). Up to 80 printable ASCII characters. Use “.” To clear field. PSwDownload 2 source Ddirectory of the required FTP server i*DownloadSwFile (*FT ) ble to all units. Execution ad opera n. Integer downloadFile (1) cancel (2) PSwDownload 3 Applicaof the SW downlo tio*ConfigurationFileLoading (*FT ble to all units. peplo PParameters 3) ApplicaConfiguration file and ODefaults file download/uparameters. rator ad *ConfigurationFileName (*Co 1) nits. The name ile to b DisplayString (SIZE(80)). to 20 printable ASCII characters. An empty string is not allowed. nfigurationFileLoading Applicable to all uof the configuration fdownloaded/uploaded. e Up*Op (*Co ing 2) efaults fil ded. DisplayString (SIZE(80)). Up to 20 printable ASCII characters. An empty string is not allowed. eratorDefaultsFileNamenfigurationFileLoad Applicable to all units. Theof the Operator Ddownloaded/uploa name e to be*FT Di(*ConfigurationFileLoading 3) Thequired fileFTP server ng (SIZE(80)). intable ASCII characters. Use “.” To clear field. PConfigurationFileSource r Applicable to all units.directory of the re source in the DisplayStriUp to 80 pr*Ex eL(*ConfigurationFileLoading 4) Exee file download/uploadoperation. ger GetConfiguration File (1) executeFTPPutConfiguration File (2) executeFTPGetOperator Defaults (3) executeFTPPutOperator Defaults (4) cancel (5) ecuteFTPConfigurationFil oading Applicable to all units.of th cution Inte executeFTP *Ev(*FTPParameters 4) its. Evead parameters. entLogFileUploading Applicable to all unfile uplo nt Log *Ev(*Ev The DisplayString (SIZE(80)). entLogFileName entLogFileUploading 1) Applicable to all units. of the event log file to be uploaded. name Up to 20 printable ASCIIcharacters. *EventLogDestinationDir (*EventLogFileUploading 2) e event r DisplayString (SIZE(80)). Up to 80 printable ASCII characters. Use “.” To clear ld. Applicable to all units. The destination directory for thlogd file in the FTP serve fie*Upl(*Ev ll units. ent log Integer loadFile (1) cancel (2) oadEventLogFile entLogFileUploading 3) Applicable to aExecution of the evoperation upload up*LoadingStatus (*UnitControl 11) he status ding Integer inProcess (1) ccessful (2) failed (3) Applicable to all units. Tof an FTP or TFTP loaprocess. su*EventLogFileParams (*UnitControl 12) Event Log parameters BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 167
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *Ev(*Ev ee log Integer ) error (3) fatal(4) one(5) entLogPolicy entLogFileParams 1) Applicable to all units. Thseverity of events to b lowest ged. message (1warning (2)logN*EraseEventLog (*EventLogFileParams 2) ble to all units. Eraslog file. eraseEventLog (1) cancel(2) Applica e the Integer *SysLocation (*UnitControl 13) Applicable to allocation. l units. The unit DisplayString (SIZE(0..34)) *FeatureUpgrade (*UnitControl 14 Feature Upgrade parameters ) *FeatureUpgradeManually (* Applicable to all units. e unit to support new DisplayString (SIZE(32..64)) string: 32 to 64 imal digits. FeatureUpgrade 1) Upgradfeature. License hexadecE.2 twork r rs .3 Ne Management Pa amete MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *NwMngParameters sVLMib 3) Np (breezeAcces etwork management arameters. *AccessToNwMng (*NwMngParameters 1) Atm Infr (1) fromEthernetOnly (2) fromBothWirelessnAndEthernet (3) na (255) pplicable to all units. The port o be used for remote anagement. teger omwirelessOnly*NwMngFilter (*NwMngParameters 2) AofmInteger disable (1) activateOnEthernetPort (2) activateOnWirelessPort (3) activateOnBothWirelessAndEthernet (4) napplicable to all units. Disables r enable IP address based iltering of management essages on one or both ports. (255) mngIpFilterTable (*NwMngParameters 3) Au sses of stations that are authorized to access the uN pplicable to all units. A table of p to 10 IP addrenit for management purposes. ot accessible. mngIpFilterEntry (mngIpFilterTable 1) AMTpplicable to all units. A anagement IP Addresses able entry. Not accessible. *NwMngIpAddress Applicable to all units. An IP aAIP address (mngIpFilterEntry 1) ddress in the Management IP ddresses Table entry. *NwMngIpTableIdx (mngIpFilterEntry 2) ARe t IP AInteger 1-10 pplicable to all units. ead-only. A table index for an ntry in the Managemenddresses Table. *DeleteOneNwIpAddr (*NwMngParameters 4) A Deletes a single selected entry from the Management IP Addresses Table. Integer cancelOperation (0) deleteEntry (1…10) na (255) pplicable to all units. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 168
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *DeleteAllNwIpAddrs (*NwMngParameters 5) AeAIn eteAll (1) cancelOperation (2) na (255) pplicable to all units. Deletes all ntries from the Management IP ddresses Table. delteger *AccessToNwTrap (*NwMngParameters 6) AdtInteger disable (1) enable (2) pplicable to all units. Enables or isables the sending of SNMP raps. mngTrapTable Applicable to all units. A table of tions . Not accessible. (*NwMngParameters 7) up to 10 IP addresses of stato which to send SNMP trapsmngTrapEntr (mngTrapTable 1) Applicable to all units. A Management Trap Table entry. No yt accessible. *NwMngTrapCommunity Ap he trap co ith the apMaDisplayStrinUp to 14 pri ble ASCII characters. (mngTrapEntry 1) plicable to all units. Tmmunity associated wplicable entry in the nagement Trap Table. gnta (SIZE(14)) *NwMngTrapAddress (mngTrapEntry 2) ApadTaress plicable to all units. An IP IP adddress in the Management Trap ble. *NwMngTrapTableIdx Applicable to all units. Read only. IndMaInteger (mngTrapEntry 3) ex for an entry in the nagement Trap Table. 1-10 *DeleteOneTrapAddr (*NwMngParameters 8) ApsinMa ereteEntry(255) plicable to all units. Deletes a gle selected entry from the Integer cancelOpnagement Trap Table. delna ation (0) (1…10) *DeleteAllTrapAddrs (*NwMngParameters 9) Ap entries from the Management TraInteger deleteAll (1)lOper5) plicable to all units. Deletes allp Table. cancena (25 ion (2) at*MngIpRangesTable 10) (*NwMngParameters ApMaRaplicable to all units. A table of nagement IP Address nges. Not accessible. *MngIpRangesEntry Ap An entry in Ad (*MngIpRangesTable 1) plicable to all units. the table of Management IP dress Ranges. Not accessible. *MngIpRangeIdx (*MngIpRangesEntry 1) ApanRaplicable to all units. Index of entry in the IP Address nges Table. Integer 1-10 *MngIPRangeFlag (*MngIpRangesEntry 2) AptheUs(raor (rae ByStartEndAddr(1), edByStartAddrMask(2) plicable to all units. Defines method of defining the range: ing Start & End Addresses Integer rangeDefinrangeDefinngeDefinedByStartEndAddr), using Start Address and Mask ngeDefinedByStartAddrMask d*MngIpRangeStart (*MngIpRangesEntry 3) ApAd ess plicable to all units. Start dress of the range. IP addr*MngIpRangeEnd (*MngIpRangesEntry 4) ApAdif brans plicable to all units. End dress of the range. Used only rzaccVLMngIPRangeFlag is IP addresgeDefinedByStartEndAddr *MngIpRangeMask ) Apsuonlbrzranss (*MngIpRangesEntry 5 plicable to all units. The IP addrebnet mask of the range. Used y if accVLMngIPRangeFlag is geDefinedByStartAddrMask. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 169
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *DeleteOneNwIpRange s 11) ApsinMa peration (0) Entry (1…10) 255) (*NwMngParameter plicable to all units. Deletes a gle selected entry from the nagement IP Ranges Table. Integer cancelOdeletena (*DeleteAllNwIpRanges (*NwMngParameters 12) ApenRa eteAll (1) per on (2) plicable to all units. Deletes all tries from the Management IP Integer delnges Table. cancelOna (255) atiE.2. me 4 IP Para ters MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *(breezeAccessVLMib 4) IpParams *UnitIpAddress (*IpParams 1) Aodres pplicable to all units. IP address f the unit. IP ad s*(Amask of the uniSubNetMask *IpParams 2) pplicable to all units. Subnet t. IP address *(Applicable to all units. Default gIP addresDefaultGWAddress *IpParams 3) ateway IP address of the unit. s *UseDhcp (AcldimpDcacDm*U*DInteger (1nlutomatic*IpParams 4) pplicable to all units. DHCP ient mode of operation. sable: Use regular (manual) ethods to configure IP disabledHCPOaarameters. HCP Only: Use DHCP server to onfigure IP parameters. utomatic: Use DHCP server to onfigure IP parameters. If a HCP server is not available, use anually configured values for nitIpAdress, *SubnetMask and efaultGWAdress. ) y (2) (3) *(AbDr irelomEthefromBothWirelessAndEthernet (3) AccessToDHCP *IpParams 5) pplicable to all units. The port to e used for communicating with a HCP server. IntegefromWfr essOnly (1) rnetOnly (2)*(ATisththIPresRunTimeIPaddr *IpParams 6) pplicable to all units. Read-only: he run-time IP address. If DHCP used, the run-time IP address is e address given to the unit by IP adde server. Alternatively the static address is used. s * (*IpParams 7) AT sk. If DsthAmresRunTimeSubNetMask pplicable to all units. Read-only: IP addhe run-time subnet maHCP is used, the run-time ubnet mask is the mask given to e unit by the server. lternatively the static subnet ask value is used. s BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 170
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *(*IpParams 8) ATIfGa he unit by the sdddresRunTimeDefaultIPGateway pplicable to all units. Read-only: he run-time Gateway IP address. DHCP is used, the Run Time ateway IP Address is the ddress given to tIP aerver. Alternatively, the static efault gateway is used. s E.2. Bridge Par 5 ameters MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *BridgeParameters (breezeAccessVLMib 5) Bridge parameters. *VLANSupport (*BridgeParameters 1) Applicable to all units. VLAN suppoparamete rt rs. Applicable to Access Link only. *VlanID Applicable to SU/RB only. VLAN ID for AN ID) (*VLANSupport 1) data frame tagging. Integer 1-4094. 0 –na (no VL*EthernetLinkType (*VLANSupport 2) Applicable to all units. VLAN support e for accessLink (1) trunkLink (2) mode (Link Type). The accessLink option is not availablAU. Integer hybridLink (3) *ManagementVID (*VLANSupport 3) Applicable to all units. VLAN ID for management frame tagging. Intege1-4094 r 65535 - no VLAN tagging. *VLANForwarding (*VLANSupport 4) VLAN forwarding feature parameters. *VlanForwardingSupport (*VLANForwarding 1) Applicable to all units. Enables or disables ) the VLAN forwarding feature. Applicable to Trunk links only. Integer disable (1enable (2) na (255) *VlanForwardingTable 2) (*VLANForwarding Applicable to all units. A table of up to 20VLAN IDs of devices to which data framesare forwarded when the VLAN Forwardingfeature is Enabled. Applicable to Trunk links only. Not accessible. *VlanForwardingEntry (*VlanForwardingTable 1) only. Applicable to all units. A VLAN Forwarding Table entry. Applicable to Trunk linksNot accessible. *VlanForwardingTableIdx (*VlanForwardingEntry 1) e Integer 1-20 Applicable to all units. A read only tablindex for a VLAN entry in the VLAN Forwarding Table. *VlanIdForwarding (*VlanForwardingEntry 2) . To w Integer 1-4094 -remove entry. Applicable to all units. The list of VLAN ID's in the VLAN ID Forwarding Tableremove a VLAN ID - SET the corresponding entry to 0. To add a neVLAN ID SET an entry which is now 0. 0*VLANRelaying (*VLANSupport 5) t VLAN Relaying feature parameters. Noapplicable to BreezeNET B products.*VlanRelayingSupport (*VLANRelaying 1) products. Enables or Integer disable (1) nable (2) na (255) Applicable to AU only. Not applicable toBreezeNET B disables the VLAN Relaying feature. Applicable to Trunk links only. eBreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 171
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *VlanRelayingTable (*VLANRelaying 2) e VLAN o Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to BreezeNET B products. A table of up to20 VLAN IDs of devices to which data frames are relayed when th Relaying feature is Enabled. Applicable tTrunk links only. Not accessible. *VlanRelayingEntry (*VlanRelayingTable 1) ly. Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to BreezeNET B products. A VLAN Relaying Table entry. Applicable to Trunk links onNot accessible. *VlanRelayingTableIdx U only. Not applicable to Integer Applicable to A(*VlanRelayingEntry) 1 BreezeNET B products. A read only table index for a VLAN entry in the VLAN Relaying Table. 1-20 *VlanIdRelaying (*VlanRelayingEntry 2) AN a VLAN ID - SET the 1-4094 0-remove entry. Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to BreezeNET B products. The list of VLID's in the VLAN ID Relaying Table. To removeInteger corresponding entry to 0. To add a new VLAN ID SET an entry which is now 0. *VLANTrafficPriority VLAN traffic priority parameters. (*VLANSupport 6) *VlanDataPriority g for data frames. teger 0 – 7 Applicable to SU/RB only. Priority taggin In(*VLANTrafficPriority 1) Applicable to Access Link only. 255-na *VlanManagementPriority (*VLANTrafficPriority 3) Applicable to all units. Priority tagging formanagement frames. Applicable to Access Link and Trunk Link only. Integer 0 – 7 255-na *VlanPriorityThreshold Applicable to all units. Not applicable to Priority threshold for tagged frames received from Ethernet port. Applicable to Hybrid Link and Trunk Link only. Integer 0 – 7 255-na (*VLANTrafficPriority 4) units with SW version 3.1 and higher where this parameter is replaced by *( 2) Applica ridge aging timfor devi therand wir (seconds) BridgeAgingTime eters ble to all units. B e et Integer 20 – 2000 *BridgeParam ces learned from both the Eeless link ports. n*( ) Applica icable toBreeze s or disablemessagInteger disable (1) BroadcastRelaying *BridgeParameters 4 ble to AU only. Not applNET B products. Enables the relaying of broad cast es to the wireless link. enable (2) na (255) *(*BridgeParameters 5) Applica toBreezedisable essages to the w enable (2) na (255) UnicastRelaying ble to AU only. Not applicableNET B products. Enables or s the relaying of unicast mireless link. Integer disable (1) *EthBroadcastFiltering (*BridgeParameters 6) ApplicadisablebroadcdisableonEthrnreceive ly. onWirelessOnly: Filters broadcasts received on the wireless port only. onBothWirelessAndEthernet: Filters broadcasts received on both ports. Integer disable (1) EthernetOnly (2) wirelessOnly (3) thWirelessAndEtherne ) na (ble to SU/RB only. Enables or s the filtering of Ethernet (layer2) asts. : No filtering. etOnly: Filters broadcasts d on the Ethernet port ononononBot (4255) *EthBroadcastingParameters (*BridgeParameters 7) BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 172
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range * verrideFilt(*EthBroadcastingParameters 1) Applica or disable f DHCP messag neral *EthBro dcast filtering na (255) DHCPBroadcastOer ble to SU/RB only. Enables s the broadcasting oes, overriding the geadcastFiltering Ethernet broa option. Integer disable (1) enable (2) *PPPoEBroadcastOverrideFil( Parameters 2) Applicadisable messag l *EthBro broadcfilteringInteger able (1) ter *EthBroadcastingble to SU/RB only. Enables or s the broadcasting of PPPoEes, overriding the generaadcastFiltering Ethernet option. ast enable (2) na (255) dis*ARPBroadcastOverrideFilter (*EthBroadcastingParameters 3) Applica s or disable ARP messag*EthBro dcfilteringger ble to SU/RB only. Enables the broadcasting of es, overriding the general adcastFiltering Ethernet broa option. ast disable (1) enable (2) na (255) Inte*EthBroadcastMulticastLimiterOption (*EthBroadcastingParameters 4) Applica tlimiter f t packets limitOnlyBroadcasts(2) limitMulticastsExceptBroadcasts(3) limitAllMulticasts(4) ble to all units. Enable/disable he Integer disable (1)or multicast and broadcas. *EthBroadcastMulticastLimiterThreshold (*EthBroadcastingParametersApplica for the allowedbroadcEtherne ast Limiter Option Integer 0 - 204800 ble to all units. The limit number of multicast and ast packets when the t Broadcast/Multicis enabled 5) *EthBroadcastMulticastLimiterSendTrapInterval (*EthBroadcastingParameters 5) Applica timin minu traps that are r of packetsEtherne ince the lastger 1-60 ble to all units. The minimumtes between two successive sent, indicating the numbe that were dropped by the t Broadcast/Multicast Limiter s trap was sent. e Inte*ToSPriorityParameters (*BridgeParameters 8) *ToSPrecedenceThreshold (*T Applica le to units wiPriority foframesInteger ble to all units. Not applicabth SWoSPriorityParameters 1) version 3.1 and higher. threshold (based on the ToS) received from Ethernet port. r 0-7 *RoamingOption (*BridgeParameters 9) Applica ble the roa he SU will start scanning for an AU/RB after one sec from current w AU/BU wireles n behalf o her devices location or seven s ing, and it w SNAPs. Integer disable (1) enable (2) na (255) ble to SU/RB only.Disable/enaming feature. When enabled, tond of not receiving beacons AU/BU. Once it found a ne, it will also send through thes network a roaming SNAP of its clients informing ot in the network of their new. When disabled, it will wait feconds before starting scannill not send roaming*MacAd(MAC A dressDenyList *BridgeParameters 10) ddress Deny List parameters * (*MacAddressDenyList 1) Applica to Breeze MAC Aallowed to transfer data to the AU. Not accessi MacAddressDenyListTable ble to AU only. Not applicableNET B units. A list of up to 100ddresses of SUs that are not ble. *MacAddressDenyListEntry (*MacAddressDenyListTable 1) Applica plicable to Breeze ry in the Mac Address Deny List Table. Not accessible. ble to AU only. Not apNET B units. An entBreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 173
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *d(*MacAddressDenyListEntry 1) Applica toBreeze nly table index fo MAddrese: 1 to 100 MacAddressDenyListTableIx ble to AU only. Not applicableNET B units. A read or a MAC Address entry in the s Deny List Table. Integer Rangac *MacAddressDenyListId (*MacAddressDenyListEntry 2) Applica to Breeze Addres ddress Deny List Table. Sthe cor anew MA hicis curreMAC Address ble to AU only. Not applicableNET B units. The list of MACses in the MAC ATo Remove a MAC Address - responding entry to 0. To AddC Address - SET an entry wntly 0. ET h *MacAddressDenyListAdd (*MacAddressDenyList 2) Applica U only. Not applicable to Breeze addresto the M MAC Address ble to ANET B units. Add a MAC s AC Address Deny List Table*MacAddressDenyListRemove (*MacAddressDenyList 3) Applica ble toBreeze ve a MAC addres LTable ble to AU only. Not applicaNET B units. Remo ist MAC Address s from the MAC Address Deny*NumberOfMacAddressesInDenyList (*MacAddressDenyList 4) Applica toBreezenumbe MACAddresble to AU only. Not applicableNET B units. Read only. The r of MAC addresses in the s Deny List Table. Integer Range: 0 to 100 Na (255) *PortsControl (*BridgeParameters 11) Ports C Applicable toSU/RB only. ontrol parameters. *Ethern(Applicable to SU/RB only Enable endisable dManag), etPortControl *PortsControl 1) . /disable the Ethernet po Integer disable (1. enable (2), na (255) rt. Whd, only data frames are blockeement frames are accepted. E.2.6 Air Interface Parameters MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *AirInterface (breezeAccessVLMib 6) Applicable to all units. Air Interface parameters. *ESSIDParameters (*AirInterface 1) Applicable to all units. ESSID Parameters. *ESSID (*ESSIDParameters 1) Applicable to all units. The Extended Service Set ID (ESSID) used to prevent the merging of collocated systems. The ESSID is accessible only with the write community string (administrator password). printable case e ASCII characters. DisplayString (SIZE(31)) 31Up tosensitiv*OperatorESSIDOption (*ESSIDParameters 2) disable (1) enable (2) Applicable to AU/BU only. Enabling/disabling the use of the Operator ESSID Integer na (255) *OperatorESSID (*ESSIDParameters 3) Applicable to AU/BU only. A secondary ESSID to supporeasy installation of SUs as well as the use of the Best AU/BU feature. Accessiblt e only with SNMP Write Community string (administrator password). . DisplayString (SIZE(31)) Up to 31 printable case sensitive ASCII characters BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 174
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *RunTimeESSID ly. P d). SIZE(31)) characters. (*ESSIDParameters 1) Applicable to SU/RB onThe ESSID of the associated AU/BU. Accessible only with SNMWrite Community string (administrator passworDisplayString (Up to 31 printable case sensitive ASCII*MaximumCellDistance to all units. For hen the to U of teger or units with SW n he range is 0 to 4 Kilometers. 0 means no compensation slot size, maximal t). Applicable In(*AirInterface 2) AU/BU: read-write. For SU/RB: read-only. The distance is learned from the AU/BU. In units with SW version 2.0 and up - applicable only wRange: Fversion bellow version 2.0 the range is 0 - 50000 Meters. For units with SW versio2.0 and up tCell Distance Mode is set Manual. The highest 5distance from the AU/Bany SU/RB served by it. Affects the maximum time the units wait for a response (minimumdelay timeou message and the slot size by taking into account the round trip propagation delay. *AIFS ts. e in Integer Applicable to AU and SU. (*AirInterface 3) Not applicable to BreezeNET B producArbitration Inter-Frame Spacing (AIFS). This is the number of time slots that oneSlot (1) twoSlots (2) na (255) define the DIFS. (DIFS=SIFS+AIFS). A valuof 1 should be used onlypoint-to-point applications toallow one unit to have advantage over the other unit. *WirelessTrapThreshol(*AirInterface 4) d Applicable to AU/BU only. A wireless link quality threshold, expressed in % of Integer 1-100 (%) retransmissions, for sendingthe brzaccVLAUWirelessQualityTRAP. This trap indicate whether the quality has gone below or above the specified threshold *TransmitPowerTable (*AirInterface 5) r Applicable to all units. Not accessible. Transmit Poweparameters table. *TransmitPowerEntry Applicable to all units. Not (*TransmitPowerTable 1) accessible. An entry in the Transmit Power parameters table. *TransmitPowerIdx (*TransmitPowerEntry 1) -le. Integer 1-4 Applicable to all units. Readonly. An index of an entry in the Transmit Power parameters tabBreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 175
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *ApplicableModulationLevel (*TransmitPowerEntry 2) Applicable to all units. Read-only. The applicable modulation level for an entryin the Transmit Power parameters table. Level 8 inot applicable to units HW revision A. s with 5 (1) 2) Level1toLevel6 (Level7 (3) Level8 (4)*MaximumTxPowerRange (*TransmitPowerEntry 3) ead- DisplayString Range: -10 to the maximum allowed for the applicable modulation level. Applicable to all units. Ronly. The allowed range for the *TxPower parameter at the applicable modulation level. *TxPower try 4) led, on level. If ATPC is DisplayString SU/RB: The range is -10 dBm to the power value defined by *MaximumTxPower for the applicable modulation level. In AU/BU: The range is -10 he power value ange odulation (*TransmitPowerEn Applicable to all units. AU/BU: The transmit power defined for the applicable modulation level. SU/RB: If ATPC is disabthis is The transmit power defined for the applicablemodulatienabled, it serves as the initial transmit power for the ATPC algorithm. Range: IndBm to tdefined by *MaximumTxPowerRfor the applicable mlevel *CurrentTxPower (*TransmitPowerEntry 5) Applicable to SU/RB. The actual transmit power indBm at the applicable modulation level. ng ange: -17 to the maximum value defined by *MaximumTxPowerRange for the applicable modulation DisplayStriRlevel. *MaximumTransmitPowerTable (*AirInterface 6) rs Applicable to SU /RB. Not accessible. Maximum Transmit Power parametetable. *MaximumTransmitPowerEntry (*TransmitPowerTable 1) t the Applicable to SU/RB. Noaccessible. An entry inMaximum Transmit Power parameters table. *MaximumTransmitPowerIdx y 1) ble to SU/RB. Read- Integer (*MaximumTransmitPowerEntr Applicaonly. An index of an entry in the Maximum Transmit Power parameters table. 1-4 *MaxTxApplicableModulationLevel (*MaximumTransmitPowerEntry 2) l for an entry . (1) Level6 (2) Level7 (3) ) Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. The applicable modulation levein the Maximum Transmit Power parameters tableLevel 8 is not applicable to units with HW revision A. Level1to5Level8 (4*DefinedMaximumTxPowerRange (*MaximumTransmitPowerEntry 3) ad-wed range for ble DisplayString Range: -10 to the maximum for the applicable evel. Applicable to SU/RB. Reonly. The allothe *MaxTxPower parameter at the applicamodulation level. allowed modulation l BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 176
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *MaxTxPower (*MaximumTransmitPowerEntry 4) smit ATPC ng o the maximum e aximumTxPowerRange for the applicable modulation level. Applicable to SU/RB. The maximum tranpower level that can be either configured for the *TxPower parameter or reached by thealgorithm. DisplayStriRange: -10 tdefined by th*DefinedM *MaxNumOfAssociations B ted A: 0-512 (0-124 cryption Option is enabled). AUS-BS, AUS-SA: 0-5. na (65535) (*AirInterface 10) Applicable to AU. Not applicable to BreezeNETproducts. The upper limit for the number of Subscriber Units that can be associawith the AU. Integer AU-BS, AU-Sif Data En*BestAu (*AirInterface 11) Best AU/BU parameters. Applicable to SU/RB. *BestAuSupport (*BestAu 1) sm ) enable (2) na (255) Applicable to SU/RB. Disable/enable the Best AU/BU selection mechaniInteger disable (1*BestAuNoOfScanningAttempts (*BestAu 2) Applicable to SU/RB. The number of scanning attempts to collect information for the Best AU/BU decision Integer 1-255 *PreferredAuMacAddress (*BestAu 3) dress of the Mac Address 000000000000 means no Applicable to SU only. The MAC adpreferred AU/BU (overriding the Best AU/BU selectionprocess). preferred AU *NeighborAuTable (*BestAu 4) Not Applicable to SU/RB.accessible. Neighboring AUs/BUs table. *NeighborAuEntry ble to SU only. Not the AUs table. (*NeighborAuTable 1) Applicaaccessible. An entry inNeighboring *NeighborAuIdx (*NeighborAuEntry 1) Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. An Index of an entry inthe Neighboring AU/BU Table Range: 1…20 Integer *NeighborAuMacAdd (*NeighborAuEntry 2) ead- MAC Address Applicable to SU/RB. Ronly. The MAC Address ofthe AU/BU associated withthe entry in the Neighboring AU/BU Table *NeighborAuESSID (*NeighborAuEntry 3) community string (Administrator Password). DisplayString Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. The ESSID of the AU/BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU/BU Table. Accessible only with the SNMP Write*NeighborAuSNR (*NeighborAuEntry 4) Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. The average SNR at which the SU/RB receives the AU/BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU/BU Table. Integer Na (255) BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 177
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *NeighborAuAssocLoadStatus - ns eached its f full (1) notFull (2) na (255) (*NeighborAuEntry 5) Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The load status of the AU/BU associated with theentry in the Neighboring AU/BU Table. Full meathat it has rmaximum permitted load, meaning in AU that the number of associated SUs is the Maximum Number OAssociations (for AU) or in BU that it is already associated with an RB. Integer *NeighborAuMark (*NeighborAuEntry 6) Read-en Integer Applicable to SU/RB. only. The overall mark givby the Best AU/BU algorithm to the AU/BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU/BU Table. *NeighborAuHwRevision (*NeighborAuEntry 7) d- the with the Integer HwRevisionA (1), HwRevisionB (2), wRevisionC (3), na (255) Applicable to SU/RB. Reaonly. The HW revision ofAU/BU associated entry in the Neighboring AU/BU Table. H*NeighborAuCountryCode (*NeighborAuEntry 8) -ring Integer Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The Country Code of the AU/BU associated with the entry in the NeighboAU/BU Table. *NeighborAuSwVer (*NeighborAuEntry 9) d-he SW Version of the DisplayString Applicable to SU/RB. Reaonly. TAU/BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU/BU Table. *NeighborAuAtpcOption (*NeighborAuEntry 10) Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. The current ATPC Option of the AU/BU associated with the entry in disable (1), enable (2), na (255) the Neighboring AU/BU Table. Integer *NeighborAuAdapModOption (*NeighborAuEntry 11) ve Integer disable (1), enable (2), na (255) Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. The current AdaptiModulation Option of the AU/BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU/BU Table. *NeighborAuBurstModeOption (*NeighborAuEntry 12) ad-nt Burst Integer disable (1), 2), Applicable to SU/RB. Reonly. The curreMode Option of the AU/BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU/BU Table. enable (na (255) *NeighborAuDfsOption (*NeighborAuEntry 14) Read- with the entry in the Neighboring AU/BU Table. Integer disable (1), enable (2), na (255) Applicable to SU/RB. only. The current DFS Option of the AU/BU associated BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 178
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *NeighborAuConcatenationOption (*NeighborAuEntry 15) Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. The current Concatenation Option of the AU/BU associated with thentry in the Neighboring AU/BU Table. e disable (1), enable (2), na (255) Integer *NeighborAuLearnCountryCodeBySU e the le. Integer disable (1), 2), (*NeighborAuEntry 17) For future use. Applicable toSU/RB. Read-only. The current Country Code Learning by SU option of thAU/BU associated with entry in the Neighboring AU/BU Tabenable (na (255) *NeighborAuSecurityMode (*NeighborAuEntry 18) For future use. Applicable tSU/RB. Read-only. The current Security Mode of the AU/BU associated with the entry in the NeighborinAU/BU Tabo g le. teger wep (1), aes (2), na (255) In*NeighborAuAuthOption (*NeighborAuEntry 19) For future use. Applicable tSU/RB. Read-only. The current Authentication algoritho m of the AU/BU teger openSysteme (1), sharedKey (2), na (255) associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU/BU Table. In*NeighborAuDataEncyptOption Applicable to in Integer 1), enable (2), na (255) (*NeighborAuEntry 20) For future use.SU/RB. Read-only. The current Data Encryption option of the AU/BU associated with the entrythe Neighboring AU/BU Table. disable (*FrequencyDefinition (*AirInterface 12) Frequency Definition parameters *SubBandLowerFrequency (*FrequencyDefinition 1) ot her. The 40 to 5830 MHz he z . ion C and Integer Applicable to SU/RB. Napplicable to units with SW version 2.0 or higlowest frequency in the subset to be used for scanning. For 5.8 GHz products the range is 57using a 10 MHz resolution. For 4.9GHz products trange is 4920 to 5080 MHusing a 10 MHz resolutionFor HW Revisabove this leaf is not relevant - shall return 0. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 179
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *SubBandUpperFrequency e z the z (*FrequencyDefinition 2) Applicable to SU/RB. Not applicable to units with SWversion 2.0 or higher. The lowest frequency in the subset to be used for scanning. For 5.8 GHz products thrange is 5740 to 5830 MHusing a 10 MHz resolution.For 4.9G Hz productsrange is 4920 to 5080 MHusing a 10 MHz resolution. For HW Revision C and above this leaf is not relevant - shall return 0. Integer *ScanningStep (*FrequencyDefinition 3) r b-Bands only. The scanning step to be used for generating the frequency subset. Integer mhz-5 (1), Applicable to all units - Foflexible SuFor units with version 2.0 and above this is a read-only parameter. mhz-10 (2), mhz-20 (3) na (255) *FrequencySubsetTable (*FrequencyDefinition 4) Applicable to all units. Not accessible. The Frequency Subset table that includes he wer Frequency y the Scanning all frequencies from tSub-band Loto the Sub-band Upper Frequency, using steps as defined bStep *FrequencySubsetEntry (FrequencySubsetTable 1) o all units. Not the Applicable taccessible. An entry inFrequency Subset table. *FrequencySubsetTableIdx (*FrequencySubsetEntry 1) Applicable to all units. Read-only. The index of an entry in the Frequency Subset table. Integer *FrequencySubsetFrequency (*FrequencySubsetEntry 2) r C ncion Frequency Applicable to all units withHW revision B and lowe(for units with HW revision and higher replaced by *FrequencySubsetFrequeyNew to support a resolutof 0.5 MHz). Read-only. The frequency in MHz of an entry in theSubset table. Integer *FrequencySubsetActive (*FrequencySubsetEntry 3) Read-of al list of frequencies to be used for scanning. active (1) notActive (2) Applicable to all units. only. The status of an entry in the Frequency subset Table. Only frequencies active entries will be included in the finInteger BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 180
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *FrequencySubsetFrequ(*FrequencySubsetEn encyNew try 4) ead- MHz nd higher). ng Applicable to all units. Ronly. The frequency inof an entry in the Frequency Subset table. (Replaces *FrequencySubsetFrequency to support a resolution of 0.5 MHz for units with HWrevision C aDisplayStri*SetSelectedFreqsSubset (*FrequencyDefinition 5) pply ed for dFreqsSubset (1) Applicable to all units. Athe selected subset. After the next reset the new subset will be usscanning. Integer SetSelectecancel (2) *CurrentFrequencySubsetTable . Not t t (*FrequencyDefinition 6) Applicable to all unitsaccessible. The CurrenFrequency Subset table thaincludes all frequencies that are currently used for scanning. *CurrentFrequencySubsetEntry nits. Not (CurrentFrequencySubsetTable 1) Applicable to all uaccessible. An entry in the Current Frequency Subset table. *CurrentFrequencySubsetTableIdx ySubsetEntry 1) Applicable to all units. Read- Integer (*CurrentFrequenc only. The index of an entry in the Current Frequency Subset table. *CurrentFrequencySubset nits with C tFr Integer Frequency (*FrequencySubsetEntry 2) Applicable to all uHW revision B and lower (for units with HW revisionand higher replaced by *CurrentFrequencySubseequencyNew to support aresolution of 0.5 MHz). Read-only. The frequency in MHz of an entry in the Current Frequency Subset table. *CurrentFrequencySubset FrequencyNew (*FrequencySubsetEntry 3) ead- es . ng Applicable to all units. Ronly. The frequency in MHzof an entry in the CurrentFrequency Subset table. (Replac*CurrentFrequencySubsetFrequency to support a resolution of 0.5 MHz for units with HW revision C and higher)DisplayStri*CurrentAUOperatingFrequency (*FrequencyDefinition 7) on C quen operating Integer For 5.8 GHz products with SW version below 2.0 the range is 5740 to 5830 MHz 0 MHz resolution. with SW version 2.0 and up the range is as defined in the selected Sub-and. Applicable to AU/BU with HW revision B and lower (for units with HW revisiand higher replaced by *CurrentUOperatingFrecyNew to support a resolution of 0.5 MHz). Read-only. Thefrequency in MHz. using a 1For unitsBBreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 181
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *AUDefinedFrequency (*FrequencyDefinition 8) Applicable to AU/BU with and higher replaced by requion et. products with below 2.0 the 740 to 5830 MHz 0M Hz resolution. version 2.0 and up the range is as defined in the selected Sub-Band. HW revision B and lower (for units with HW revision C*DefinedAUOperatingFencyNew to support a resolution of 0.5 MHz). Read-only. For 5.8 GHz products with SW versbelow 2.0 this is the frequency in MHz of the AU/BU after the next resFor units with SW version 2.0 and up this is the frequency in MHz to use when the DFS Option is disabled. Integer For 5.8 GHzSW versionrange is 5using a 1For units with SW*CurrentSUOperatingFrequen(*FrequencyDefinition 9) cy ead ng products with below 2.0 the 740 to 5830 MHz z resolution. Applicable to SU/RB. Ronly. The current operating frequency in MHz. DisplayStriFor 5.8 GHzSW versionrange is 5using a 10 MHFor units with SW version 2.0 and up the range is as defined in the selected Sub-Band. *SubBandSelect (*FrequencyDefinition 10) Sub-Band Selection parameters *SelectSubBandIndex (*SubBandSelect 1) he ID of the sub-band used by Applicable to all units. Tthe unit. Integer *DFSParameters (*FrequencyDefinition 11) DFS Parameters. Applicable to AU/BU. *DFSOption (*DFSParameters 1) licable if d nd. Applicable to AU/BU. Enabling/disabling the DFS Algorithm. Not appDFS Option is not supporteby the current Sub-BaInteger disable (1) enable (2) na (255) *DFSChannelCheckTime (*DFSParameters 3) r cting radar in the previously used Range: 1 to 3600 (seconds). Applicable to AU/BU. Defines the time the unit checks the channel fopresence of radar signals and does not transmit after power up or associationor after moving to a newchannel due to detechannel. Integer*DFSChannelAvoidancePeriod (*DFSParameters 4) fter detecting radar signals in a channel of avoiding using the channel or adjacent channels in accordance with the bandwidth. 60 (minutes). Applicable to AU/BU. Defines the time a Integer Range: 1 to BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 182
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *DFSSuWaitingOption (*DFSParameters 5) ey enable (2) na (255) Applicable to AU/BU. Defines whether the associated SUs may shouldwait for this AU/BU after it stopped transmitting due to radar detection, before thstarts scanning for other AUs/BUs. Integer disable (1)*DFSClearRadarChannels (*DFSParameters 6) rate Integer cancel (1) clearRadarChannels (2) na (255) Applicable to AU/BU. Clear Radar Detected and Adjacent to Radar channelsafter unit reset. Returns the unit to opein default frequency *DFSRadarDetectionChannelsTable (*DFSParameters 7) n r Applicable to AU/BU. Applicable only when DFS option is on. Displays the current channels defined ithe sub-band and their radadetection status. *DFSRadarDetectionChannelsEntrrDetectionChannelsTa. ble. y (*DFSRadable 1) Applicable to AU/BUAn entry in the DFS Radar Detection Channels Ta*DFSChannelIdx nChannelsEnt Integer (*DFSRadarDetectiory 1) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The index of the entryin the DFS Radar DetectionChannels Table. *DFSChannelFrequency (*DFSRadarDetectionChannelsEnt d lower C and higher replaced by * -only. The frequency in MHz of a ar Integer ry 2) Applicable to AU/BU withHW revision B an(for units with HW revisionDFSChannelFrequency New to support a resolutionof 0.5 MHz). Readchannel in the DFS RadDetection Channels Table. *DFSChannelRadarStatus (*DFSRadarDetectionChannelsEntry 3) nels r (2) cted (3) Applicable to AU/BU. The radar detection status of a channel in the DFS Radar Detection ChanTable. Integer radarFree (1) adjacentToRadaradarDete*DFSChannelFrequencyNew (*DFSRadarDetectionChannelsEnt r 0.5 ry 4) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The frequency of a channel in the DFS RadaDetection Channels Table. (Replaces *DFSChannelFrequency to support a resolution of MHz for units with HW revision C and higher). DisplayString *DFSMinimumPulsesToDetect (*DFSParameters 8) detect radar. 1 - 100 Applicable to AU/BU. Defines the minimum number of pulses toInteger *DFSChannelReuseParameters (*DFSParameters 9) Channel Reuse Parameters BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 183
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *DFSChannelRe(*DFSChannelReuuseOption seParameters 1) e DFS Applicable to AU/BU. Enabling/disabling thChannel Reuse Algorithm.Integer disable (1)enable (2) na (255) *DFSRadarActivityAssessmentPeriod (*DFSChannelReuseParameters 2) AU/BU. ity Applicable toThe period in hours for assessment of radar activwhen the Channel reuse algorithm is enabled. Integer 1 – 12 hours. *DFSMaximumNumberOfDetectionseParameters U/BU. The f radar e original ching Integer – 10 detections. sInAssessmentPeriod (*DFSChannelReu3) Applicable to Amaximum number odetection in thchannel during the Radar Activity Assessment Period that is required for reaa decision to try again the original channel. 1*CountryCodeLearningBySU (*FrequencyDefinition 12) eather the SU Integer disable (1) 2) Applicable to AU only. Defines wshould learn the country code of the AU. enable (na (255) *CurrentAUOperatingFrequencyNew W DisplayString For 5.8 GHz products with ion below 2.0 the to 5830 MHz Hz resolution. with SW version 2.0 and up the range is as n the selected Sub-(*FrequencyDefinition 13) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The operatingfrequency in MHz. (Replaces *CurrentAUOperatingFrequency to support a resolution of 0.5 MHz for units with Hrevision C and higher). SW versrange is 5740using a 10 MFor units defined iBand. *AUDefinedFrequencyNew (*FrequencyDefinition 14) Read-sion below 2.0 se n is For 5.8 GHz products with SW version below 2.0 the 5740 to 5830 MHz Hz resolution. ersion 2.0 and up the range is as n the selected Sub-Applicable to AU/BU.only. For 5.8 GHz products with SW verthis is the frequency in MHz of the AU/BU after the next reset. For units with SW version 2.0 and up this is the frequency in MHz to uwhen the DFS Optiodisabled. (Replaces *AUDefinedFrequency to support a resolution of 0.5 MHz for units with HW revision C and higher). DisplayString range is using a 10 MFor units with SW vdefined iBand. *ATPC (*AirInterface 13) ATPC parameters *AtpcOption (*ATPC 1) Applicable to all units. Enabling/disabling the ATPC Algorithm Indisateger ble (1) enable (2) na (255) BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 184
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *DeltaFromMinSNRLevel (*ATPC 2) red level, 4-20 (dB) Applicable to AU/BU. The Minimum SNR Level plus the value of this parameter define the maximum desilevel of the average SNR at the AU/BU. If the ATPC Option is enabled, than if the received SNR is above the maximum desired the AU/BU will transmit Power-Down messages to the applicable SU/RB. Integer *MinimumSNRLevel (*ATPC 3) vel in dB of the PC Integer 4-60 (dB) Applicable to AU/BU. Defines the minimum desired leaverage SNR at the AU/BU. Below this level, if ATPC Option is enabled, the AU/BU will transmit ATPower-Up messages to the applicable SU/RB. *MinimumIntervalBetweenATPC Messages (*ATPC 4) up/power-down messages. Applicable to AU/BU. The minimal time between consecutive power-Integer Range: 1 to 3600 (seconds) *PowerLevelSteps (*ATPC 6) Applicable to AU/BU. The step in dB that the SU/RB will use when receiving an ATPC Power-Up/Power-Down message Integer 1-20 (dB) *CellDistanceParameters (*AirInterface 15) s Cell distance Parameter *CellDistanceMode (*CellDistanceParameters 1) The automatic (1) 2) ) Applicable AU/BU.selected mode of deciding on Cell Distance. Integer manual (5na (25*FairnessFactor (*CellDistanceParameters 2) tage of that Range: 0 to 100 (Percent). A value of 0 means the lot size (9 Applicable AU/BU. Not applicable to BreezeNET Bproducts. The percenthe maximum distanceis taken into account in the time slot calculation. Integerminimal smicroseconds). Na (255) *MeasuredMaxCellDistance (*CellDistanceParameters 3) e as calculated by the AU/BU. 2 km”. Applicable AU/BU. The Maximum Cell Distanc Integer Range: 0 to 54 (Kilometers).1 means “below*UnitWithMaxDistance (*CellDistanceParameters 4) Applicable AU only. Not applicable to BreezeNET B units. The MAC address of the unit with the maximum distance from the AU. MAC Address *ScanningMode (*AirInterface 16) Applicable to SU/RB. The scanning mode. In cells where the DFS Option is enabled Scanning Mode is forced to Passive. Integer passive (1) active (2) BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 185
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *Antenna Gai Applicable to all units. Read- Integer ble) means ot Set Yet”. urable) means n(*AirInterface 17) write in units where *AntennaGainChange is supported. Read-only inunits where *AntennaGainChange is notsupported. The net gain (including cable attenuation for detached antennas) of the antenna. 0-50 (dB) -1 (not configura“N-2 (not config“Don’t Care”. *SpectrumAnalysisParameters (*AirInterface 18) Spectrum Analysis Parameters. *SpectrumAnalysisChannelScanPeriod (*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 1) Applicable to all units. The period in seconds of staying on each channel for g information gathering durineach cycle when performingSpectrum analysis. Integer Range: 2-30 seconds. *SpectrumAnalysisChannelScanCycles (*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 2) when performing Spectrum Analysis. Applicable to all units. The number of scanning cycles Integer Range: 1-100 seconds. *AutomaticChannelSelection (*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 3) Applicable to AU/BU. Defines weather the AU/BU shall choose the most noise free channel upon startup after spectrum analysis. Integer disable (1), enable (2), na (255) *SpectrumAnalysisActivation (*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 4) pon Applicable to all units. Activates the spectrum analysis. The unit is automatically reset uactivation. Integer cancelOperation (1), activateNow (2) *SpectrumAnalysisStatus (*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 5) only. Indicates whether the unit is currently performing a spectrum analysis process. Applicable to all units. Read- Integer inactive (1), currentlyActive (2) *ResetSpectrumCounters meters 6) peration (1), ) (*SpectrumAnalysisPara Applicable to all units. Resets the spectrum analysis counters. Integer cancelOresetCounters (2*SpectrumAnalysisInformationTable (*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 7) analysis information table. Applicable to all units. Not accessible. The spectrum *SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry (*SpectrumAnalysisInformationTable 1) Applicable to all units. Not accessible. An entry in the spectrum analysis information table. *SpectrumAnalysisInformationTableIdx nalysisInformationEntrApplicable to all units. Read-only. A table index for a (*SpectrumAy 1) Spectrum Analysis Information Entry in the Spectrum Analysis Information Table. *SpectrumAnalysisInformationChannel (*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry 2) able. Applicable to all units. Read-only. The channel’s frequency of the relevant entry in the Spectrum Analysis Information TDisplayString BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 186
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *SpectrumAnalysisInformationSign(*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry 3) -of signals alCount Applicable to all units. Readonly. The number (excluding OFDM frames) detected in the channel. Integer *SpectrumAnalysisInformationSignalSNR (*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry 4) -NR frames) detected in Applicable to all units. Readonly. The approximate Sof the signals (excluding OFDMthe relevant channel. Integer *SpectrumAnalysisInformationSignalWidth (*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry 5) gnals es) levant Applicable to all units. Read-only. The average width inmicroseconds of the si(excluding OFDM framdetected in the rechannel. Integer *SpectrumAnalysisInformationOFDMFrames (*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry 6) Applicable to all units. Read-only. The number of OFDM frames received in the relevant channel. Integer * MaxNumOfAssociationsLimit (*AirInterface 19) T B e limit for Integer AU-BS, AU-SA: If Data Encryption is enabled, the upper limit is 124. Otherwise it is 512. AUS-BS, AUS-SA: 5 BreezeNET B products turn 65535. Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to BreezeNEproducts. Shows ththe number of SUs that canbe associated with the AU. re*Disassociate (*AirInterface 20) Disassociation parameters. *DisassociateAllSUs teger cancelOperation (1), disassociateAllSUs (2) (*Disassociate 1) Applicable to AU. Disassociate ass SUs. In*DisassociateSuByMacAddress ress (*Disassociate 2) Applicable to AU. Disassociate specified SU. MacAdd*TxControl (*AirInterface 21) Integer on(1) off (2) Applicable to AU/BU. Enables to turn the transmitter Off and On. The unit is reset automatically upon configuration. *LostBeaconsWa(*AirInterface 22) tchdogThreshold ons before internal refresh is performed. ange: 100..1000 or ‘0’ A value of ‘0’ means that the lost beacons watchdog is not used and internal refresh is not performed Applicable to AU/BU. The number of unsuccessful consecutive transmissions of beacInteger RBreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 187
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps E.2.7 Service Parameters MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *ServiceParameters (breezeAccessVLMib 7) Applicable to all units. Service parameters. *MirDownlink (*ServiceParameters 2) te e . Integer Range for Set: SU-3: 128 – 2,048 (Kbps) SU-6: 128 – 3,968 (Kbps) SU-54: 128 – 53,888 (Kbps) RB-14: 128 – 6,912 (Kbps) RB-28:128 – 22,016 (Kbps) The actual value (Get) will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128 (N*128) Applicable to SU/RB. TheMaximum Information Ra(MIR) from AU/BU to SU/RB. MIR must be abovbrzaccVLCirDownlink value *MirUplink (*ServiceParameters 3) e Integer Range for Set: SU-3: 128 – 2,048 (Kbps) SU-6: 128 – 3,968 (Kbps) 28 – 53,888 (Kbps) 128 – 6,912 (Kbps) 8 – 22,016 (Kbps) The actual value (Get) will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128 (N*128) Applicable to SU/RB. The Maximum Information Rat(MIR) from SU/RB to AU/BU. MIR must be above brzaccVLCirUplink value. SU-54: 14: RB-1RB-28: 12*CirDownlink (*ServiceParameters 4) from t be below . Integer Range for Set: SU-3: 0 – 2,048 (Kbps) SU-6: 0 – 3,968 (Kbps) SU-54: 0 – 45,056 (Kbps) The actual value (Get) will be red value rounded to est multiple of 128 BreezeNET B products will return 65535 for na. Applicable to SU only. Not applicable to BreezeNET B products. The Committed Information Rate (CIR)AU to SU. CIR musbrzaccVLMirDownlink value the entearthe ne(N*128). *CirUplink (*ServiceParameters 5) MirUplink value. Integer Integer Range for Set: SU-3: 0 – 2,048 (Kbps) SU-6: 0 – 3,968 (Kbps) SU-54: 0 – 45,056 (Kbps) The actual value (Get) will be e entered value rounded to est multiple of 128 (N*128). ET B products will Applicable to SU only. Not applicable to BreezeNET B products. The Committed Information Rate (CIR) fromSU to AU. CIR must be below brzaccVL ththe nearBreezeNreturn 65535 for na. *MaxDelay (*ServiceParameters 6) Applicable to SU only. Not applicable to BreezeNET B products. The maximal time packets may be delayethe CIR\MIR mechanism. d by 10000 BreezeNET B products will return 65535 for na. Above the configured maximal period the packets are discarded. Integer -Range: 300 (milliseconds) BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 188
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *MaxBurstDuration (*ServiceParameters 7) Applicable to AU aNot applicable to Breezend SU. NET B products. ng nus time rst transmissions. teger Range: 0 – 2000 (milliseconds) ET B products will na. The maximum time duriwhich inactivity bocan be accumulated for future bu InBreezeNreturn 65535 for*GracefulDegradationLimit (*ServiceParameters 8) T B ting the Integer Range: 0 – 70 (%) na (255) Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to BreezeNEproducts. The maximum limit for activagraceful degradation algorithm. *MirOnlyOption (*ServiceParameters 9) B CIR/MIR with MIR is Integer disable (1) enable (2) na (255) Applicable only to AU. Not applicable to BreezeNETproducts. When enabled, it overrides the algorithm for determining actual information rate and forces the algorithm to operateparameters’ settings only. When enabled, the GracefulDegradation algorithmdisabled. *TrafficPrioritization (*ServiceParameters 10) o all Traffic Prioritization parameters. Applicable tunits. *VLTrafficPriVLAN (*TrafficPrioritization 1) VLAN Prioritization parameters. Applicable tounits. all *LANPriorityThreshold than or equal frame will get High priority. Untagged frames will get Low priority. (*VLTrafficPriVLAN 1) Applicable to all units. If the VLAN Priority's value of theframe is lessto this threshold, the frame will get Low priority, otherwise theInteger 0-7 *TrafficPriIPToS (*TrafficPrioritization 2) ToS Prioritization l parameters. Applicable to alunits. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 189
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *ToSPrioritizationOption (*TrafficPriIPToS 1) Applicable to all units. Disable/Enable IP ToS prioritization and chooses the interpretation of the IP ToS field from IP header: ipPrecedence(2): The IP ToS field is defined by RFC791. In this case the prioritization will be done using the Precedence sub-field of IP ToS. This sub-field has 3 bits, so it can be between 0 and 7. dSCP(3): The IP ToS field is this -b-e range is defined by RFC2474. Incase the prioritization will be done using the DSCP subfield. The size of the sufield is 6 bits, so th0 to 63. Integer disable(1), ipPrecedence(2), dSCP(3) *IPPrecedenceThreshold ble to all units. The e field from a ld the frame Integer (*TrafficPriIPToS 2) Applicathreshold of Precedencsub-field of IP ToSIP Header (RFC791) to be used when the ToS Prioritization Option is set to IP Precedence. If the Precedence sub-field offrame is less than or equal to this threshowill have Low priority, otherwise it will get High priority. 0-7 *IPDSCPThreshold (*TrafficPriIPToS 3) he from IP et to -field , Integer 0-63 Applicable to all units. Tthreshold of DSCP sub-field of IP ToS fieldHeader (RFC2474) to be used when ToS Prioritization Option is sDSCP. If the DSCP subof a frame is less than or equal to this threshold the frame will have Low priorityotherwise it will get High priority. *TrafficPriUdpTcpPortRange (*TrafficPrioritization 3) ers. UDP/TCP Port Ranges Prioritization parametApplicable to all units. *UdpTcpPortRangePrioritition zationOprtRange 1) tion ill ill UDP and TCP packets Integer disable(1), (2), ), (*TrafficPriUdpTcpPoApplicable to all units. Disable/Enable Prioritizausing UDP and/or TCP Port Ranges. udpOnly(2): prioritization wbe done only for UDP packets tcpOnly(3): prioritization wbe done only for TCP packets udpANDtcp(4): prioritization will be done forudpOnlytcpOnly(3udpANDtcp(4) BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 190
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *UdpPortRangeConfig (*TrafficPriUdpTcpPortRange 2) ll UDP Port Range parameters. Applicable to aunits. *UdpPortPriRTPRTCP (*UdpPortRangeConfig 1) ts prioritization option for UDP packet. rtpANDrtcp(1): the possible RTP and RTCP packet with destination port in the defined port ranges will get High priority. rtpOnly(2): only possible RTP packet (packet with ith Applicable to all units. RTP/RTCP poreven destination port) wdestination port in the defined port ranges will get High priority. Integer rtpANDrtcp(1), rtpOnly(2) *UdpPortRangeNum (*UdpPortRangeConfig 2) l units. Read-only. The number of entries in the UDP Port Range Table. Applicable to al Integer *UdpPortRangeTable (*UdpPortRangeConfig 3) Applicable to all units. Not accessible. A table of UDP port ranges used for prioritization. The user can define up to 64 ranges. An entry is empty if start is 65535 and end is 0. *UdpPortRangeEntry (*UdpPortRangeTable 1) Applicable to all units. Not accessible. A UDP Port Ranges Table entry. *Ud ngeStart (*Ud ortRangeEntry 1) Applicable to all units. Readonly. Start port of an UDP Port Range pPortRapP -Integer 0-65535 *UdpPortRangeEnd (*UdpPortRa eEntry 2) Applicable to all units. Read-only. End port of an UDP Port Range Integer 0-65535 ng*UdpPortRangeIdx 3) l units. Read-(*UdpPortRangeEntry Applicable to alonly. Index of an UDP Port Range entry Integer -64 1*UdpPortRangeAdd (*UdpPortRangeConfig 4) Add ort rn an tring efined by d> or <start>, > f only ge is <start>-<start>. The value of <start> and <end> are between 0 and 65535. The user can add several nges using a comma to eparate between ranges. Example: 10-26,99,987-900. Applicable to all units. port range(s) to UDP PRanges Table. Get operation will retuempty string. DisplaySA range is dn<start>-<ewhere <start> is the Start and <endPort of the range Port. Iis the End<start> is specified the ranrasBreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 191
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *UdpPortRangeDelete onfig 5) om nges Table. isplayString A range is defined by <start>-<end> or <start>, > is the Start Port of the range and <end> is the End Port. If only ecified the range is <start>-<start>. The value of <start> and <end> are between 0 and 65535. The user can delete several ranges using a comma to separate between ranges. Example: 10-26,99,987-900. (*UdpPortRangeC Applicable to all units. Delete port range(s) frUDP Port RaGet operation will return an empty string. Dwhere <start<start> is sp*UdpPortRangeDeleteAll (*UdpPortRangeConfig 6) ll entries form UDP Integer deleteAll(1), eration (2) Applicable to all units. Delete aPort Ranges Table. Get operation will return 1 cancelOp*TcpPortRangeConfig (*TrafficPriUdpTcpPortRange 3) l UDP Port Range parameters. Applicable to alunits. *TcpPortPriRTPRTCP (*TcpPortRangeConfig 1) th ority. le rt) with t Integer rtpANDrtcp(1), rtpOnly(2) Applicable to all units. RTP/RTCP ports prioritization option for TCP packets. rtpANDrtcp(1): the possible RTP and RTCP packet widestination port in the defined port ranges will get High prirtpOnly(2): only possibRTP packet (packet with even destination podestination port in the defined port ranges will geHigh priority. *TcpPortRangeNum (*TcpPortRangeConfig 2) Applicable to all units. Read-only. The number of entries in the TCP Port Range Table. Integer *TcpPortRangeTable (*TcpPortRangeConfig 3) Applicable to all units. Not accessible. A table of TCP port ranges used for prioritization. The user can . An define up to 64 rangesentry is empty if start is 65535 and end is 0. *TcpPortRangeEntry pplicable to all units. Not t (*TcpPortRangeTable 1) Aaccessible. A TCP PorRanges Table entry. *TcpPortRangeStart (*TcpPortRangeEntry 1) -ge Applicable to all units. Readonly. Start port of an TCP Port RanInteger 0-65535 *TcpPortRangeEnd (*TcpPortRangeEntry 2) Applicable to all units. Read-only. End port of an TCP Port Range Integer 0-65535 *TcpPortRangeIdx (*TcpPortRangeEntry 3) Applicable to all units. Read-only. Index of an TCP Port Range entry Integer 1-64 BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 192
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *TcpPortRangeAdd (*TcpPortRangeConfig 4) Applicable to all units. Add port range(s) to TCP Port RangGet o rn an empty g. DisplayString A range is defined by <start> , where rt Port of the range and <end> is the End Port y <start> ange is <sta lue sta re ween 0 and 65535. er can add several using a comma to parate between ranges. pl ,99,987-900. es Table. eration will retup strin-<end> or <start>start> is the Sta<. If onl is specified the rrt>-<start>. The vart> and <end> aof <betThe usrangesseExam e: 10-26*TcpPortRangeDelete (*TcpPortRangeConfig 5) ApplicDeletTCP Get oemptylay rangtart>-<end> or <start>, here < the Start d <end> the E ly the range ta >. The value of <sta re between 0 and 65535. The user can delete several nges omma to para n ranges. Exampl 87-900. able to all units. e port range(s) from Port Ranges Table. peration will return an DispA<sw string. Port of the range anisString e is defined by start> isnd Port. If on<start>is <s is specifiedrt>-<startrt> and <end> arase using a cte betweee: 10-26,99,9*TcpPortRangeDeleteAll (*TcpPortRangeConfig 6) ApplicDelet orm TCP Port RoperaInteger deleteAll(1), cancelO (2) able to all units. e all entries fanges Table. Get tion will return 1 perationE.2.8 User Filtering Parameters MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *UserFilterParams eezeAccessVLMib 8) Applicable to SU/RB. User filterin (br g parameters. *UserFilterOption (*UserFilterParams 1) ApplicDefinoptiondisabiPOnlpackeuserDIP fradefine pPPoframeteger (2) userDefinedAddrOnly (3) PoE (255able to SU/RB. es user-filtering s. le: No filtering. Indisable (1) ipOnlyy: Only IP protocol ts pass. efinedAddrOnly: Only mes from/to user d IP addresses pass.pPnaE Only: Only PPPoE s pass. Only (4) ) *IpFilterTable (*UserFilterParams 2) Applictable addregroups, to be uUser Filtering Option (*UserFilterOption) is userDefinedAddrOnly. Not accessible. able to SU/RB. A of up to 8 user defined sses, or address sed if the BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 193
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *IpFilterEntry (*IpFilterTable 1) ApplicFilter accesable to SU/RB. An IP table entry. Not sible. *IpID (*IpFilterEntry 1) Applicable to SU/RB. An IP address in the IP Filter table. IP Address *MaskID (*IpFilterEntry 2) Applicable to SU/RB. An IP mask for the IP Filter entry. Either a mask or a range, but not both can be used to define an address group. If and only the range value is used to define the address group. IP Address the range is other than 0, than the mask is ignored *IpFilterRange (*IpFilterEntry 3) Applicable to SU/RB. An address range for the IP Filter entr he first address in the range is the IP address (*iPID). O means that the range is not used. Either a mask or a range, but not both can be used to define an address group. If the range is other than 0, than the mask is ignored and only the range value is used to degroup. Integer 0 - 255 y. Tfine the address *IpFilterIdx (*IpFilterEntry 4) ApplicablRead-onlthe IP File to SU/RB. y. A table index for ter entry. Integer 1-8 *DeleteOneUserFilter (*UserFilterParams 3) ApplicablDeletes aentry from tEntry (1) ondEntry (2) deletethirdEntry (3) rthEEnenhtherae to SU/RB. single selected the IP Filter table. Integer deletefirsdeletesecdeletefoudeletefifthdeletesixthEdeletesevdeleteeigcancelOpntry (4) try (5) ntry (6) thEntry (7) Entry (8) tion (9) na (255) *DeleteAllUserFilters (*UserFilterParams 4) ApplicablDeletes aIP Filter t ) erae to SU/RB. ll entries from the able. Integer deleteAll (1cancelOpna (255) tion (2) *DHCPUnicastOverrideFilter (*UserFilterParams 5) ApplicablEnables ounicast D essages, overriding the IP Filtering option. (1) enable(2) na (255) e to SU/RB. r disables the HCP mInteger disable BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 194
breezeAccessVLMib E.2.9 Security Parameters MIB Parameter De ription sc Value/Range *SecurityParams (breezeAccessVLMib 9) *AuthenticationAlgorithm (*SecurityParameters 1) Applicable to all units. Enables/disables the authentication encryption option. openSystem: Authentication messages are not encrypted. sharedKey : Authentication messages are encrypted. Integopenshareer System (1) dKey (2) *DefaultKey (*SecurityParameters 2) Applicable to SU/RB. The ID of the key to be used for encrypting/decrypting the autInteger Range: 1 to 4. hentication messages. *Da(*Securit AppEnaencntegble (1) enable (2) taEncryptionOption yParameters 3) licable to all units. bles/disables the data ryption option. Idisa er *DefaultMulticastKey (*S Appof tencmuInteger Range: 1 to 4. ecurityParameters 4) licable to AU/RB. The ID he key to be used for rypting/decrypting lticasts. *Se(*Securit Appencusemeencgp aesOCcurityMode yParameters 5) licable to all units. The ryption algorithm to be Intewed for authentication ssages and/or data ryption aeser (1) CB (2) CM (3) *PromiscuousAuthenticationMode (*SecurityParameters 6) AppEnaproanyby AUgbenable (2) licable to AU/RB. bling/disabling the miscuous mode, where Intedisa SU can be authenticated and communicate with the . er le (1) *Key1 (*SecurityParameters 7) Appnumwith ty StripasisplayString 32 hexadecimal digits licable to all units. Key ber 1. Accessible only D SNMP Write Communing (administrator sword). *Key2 (*SecurityParameters 8) AppnumwithStrislayString hexadecimal digits licable to all units. Key ber 2. Accessible only SNMP Write Community ng (administrator Disp32 pa sword). *Ke(*S ppnumwithStripasspl digits y3 AecurityParameters 9) licable to all units. Key ber 3. Accessible only SNMP Write Community ng (administrator sword). Di32 heayString xadecimal *Ke(*S AppnumwithStripassplhe igits y4 ecurityParameters 10) licable to all units. Key ber 4. Accessible only SNMP Write Community ng (administrator sword). Di32 ayString xadecimal dBreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 195
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *Se(Se 12) App rns typsupInteger (0..7) o encryption (0) PS/OCB (2) WEP B (3) /CCM (4) WEP + AES/CCM (5) ES/OCB + AES/CCM (6) /OCB AES/CCM (7) curityModeSupport curityParameters licable to all units. Retues of encryption that are ported NWEAEAESAWEP + AES+ (1) + AES/OCE.2.10 Performance Para meters MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *PerformanceParams (breezeAccessVLMib 10) *RTSThreshold (*PerformanceParams 1) Applicable to SU and Aapplicable to BreezeNEproducts. The minimum framsize that requires an RTS/CU. Not T B e TS es) g SW low 400 for ith SW ersion 3.0) na (65535) handshake. Integer 20-4032 (bytr(20-1600 foinunits runnbeversion 0-33.0, 2nits wuv*MinContentionWindow (*PerformanceParams 3) Applicable to SU and AU. Not applicable to BreezeNET B products. The initial value to be used by the contention window calculation algorithm. A value of 0 disables the back-off ould be used y in point-to-point applications. Integer 0, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511, 1023. na (65535) algorithm and shonl*MaxContentionWindow t 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511, 1023 na (65535) (*PerformanceParams 4) Applicable to SU and AU. Noapplicable to BreezeNET B products. The maximum value to be used by the contention window calculation algorithm. Integer *MaximumModulationLes 5vel ) is enabled, it sets the maximum set the to 8* ends version Levels as defined by Sub-(*PerformanceParam Applicable to all units. If the Adaptive Modulation algorithm modulation level to be used. If The Adaptive Modulation algorithm is disabled, it fixed modulation level to be used. Integer Range: 1 ange dep*Ron HWand Min/Max Modulation Band. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 196
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *MulticastModulationLevel Applicable to AU/BU. The modulation level for multicast and broadcast data frames. Range: 1 to 8* *Range depends n and Min/Max Modulation Levels as defined by Sub-Band. (*PerformanceParams 6) Integer on HW versio*AvgSNRMemoryFactor (*PerformanceParams 7) TPC DisplayString -1 (Disregard History) to 32 Applicable to all units. The weight of history in average RSSI calculation for the A(AU only) and Adaptive Modulation algorithm. The higher is the value, the higher is the weight of history *HardwareRetries (*PerformanceParams 8) ed Integer 1-15 Applicable to all units. The maximum number of trials to transmit an unacknowledgframe in each Hardware Retrials phase. *AdaptiveModulationParams (*PerformanceParams 9) Adaptive Modulation Parameters *AdaptiveModulationAlgorithmOption (*AdaptiveModulationParams 1) l units. daptive Integer enable (2) Applicable to alEnabling/disabling the AModulation algorithm. disable (1) *SoftwareRetrySupport (*AdaptiveModulationParams 2) sion he are Retry d on is Integer disable (1) enable (2) na (255) Applicable to all units. Read-only for units with ver2.0. Not applicable for units withSW version 3.0 and higher. Tstatus of the Softwmechanism. Enabled when the Adaptive Modulation algorithm is enableand the Burst Mode Optidisabled. Otherwise it is disabled. *NumberOfSoftwareRetries its. Read-only for units with version 2.0. Not applicable for units with SW version 3.0 and higher. The maximum number of times to use the Software Retry mechanism when it is enabled. Integer (*AdaptiveModulationParams 3) Applicable to all un 0-14 *MinimumIntervalBetweenAdaptiveModulation(*AdaptiveModulationParams 4) two 1-3600 (seconds) AlgorithmMessages Applicable to all units. The minimum interval between consecutive adaptive modulation algorithm messages carrying information on the SNR of received signals. Integer *AdaptiveModulationDecisionThresholds (*AdaptiveModulationParams 5) its. Defines the setting of thresholds for the rate decision algorithm. high (2) should typically be used when the SNR is lower than 13 dB. Integer normal (1) high (2) na (255) Applicable to all un*BurstMode (*PerformanceParams 10) Burst Mode Parameters. Applicable to all units. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 197
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *BurstModeOption (*BurstMode 1) Applicable to all units. Applicable only if Burst Mode Option is supported by the Band. Enabling/disabling bursmode operation. blocked (3) value is returned when trying to enable Burst Mode when it should not be used due to the configuration of certain other parameters. These limitationdepend on HW reviSub-t s sion and unit type. disable (1) enable (2) blocked (3) na (255) Integer *BurstInterval (*BurstMode 2) Applicable to all units. The burst interval in milliseconds. Integer 1-the maximum value as defined in the Sub-Band. ) na (255) (milliseconds*ConcatenationParameters (*PerformanceParams 11) Concatenation Parameters. Applicable to all units. *ConcatenationOption (*ConcatenationParameters 1) . chanism. Integer disable (1) enable (2) a (255) Applicable to all unitsEnabling/disabling the concatenation me n*ConcatenationMaximumNumberOfFrames Applicable to all units. umber Integer (*ConcatenationParameters 2) Defines the maximum nof data frames that can be concatenated. 2 – 8 E.2.11 Site Survey Parameters MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *SiteSurvey (breezeAccessVLMib 11) *AverageReceiveSNR (*SiteSurvey 1) mes. Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. The average Signal to Noise Ratio of received fraInteger *TrafficStatistics (*SiteSurvey 2) Applicable to all units. Traffic statistics parameters. *ResetTrafficCounters (*TrafficStatistics 1) Applicable to all units. Resets the traffic counters. cancel (2) Integer reset (1) *EthCounters (*TrafficStatistics 2) Applicable to all units. Ethernet counters. *TotalRxFramesViaEthernet (*EthCounters 1) Applicable to all units. Read-only. Total number of frames received via the Ethernet port. Counter 32 *TxWirelessToEthernet its. er of Counter 32 (*EthCounters 2) Applicable to all unRead-only. Total numbframes transmitted to the Ethernet port. *WirelessLinkCounters (*TrafficStatistics 3) s Applicable to all units. Wireleslink counters. *TxFramesToWireless (*WirelessLinkCounters 1) Transmitted frames counters BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 198
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *AUBeaconsToWireless (*TxFramesToWireless 1) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The number of Beacon frames transmitted to the wireless medium. Counter 32 *DataAndOtherMngFramesToWireless mes nd one icast frame ). Counter 32 (*TxFramesToWireless 3) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The number of data and other management fra(excluding beacons) transmitted to the wireless medium. The count includes multicasts/broadcasts acount for each untransmitted successfully (excluding retransmissions*TotalTxFramesToWireless (*TxFramesToWireless 4) he count ess management Counter 32 Applicable to all units. Read-only. The number of frames transmitted to the wireless medium. Tincludes one count for each data frame transmitted successfully (excluding retransmissions), and the number of transmitted control and wirelframes. *TotalTransmitted Unicasts (*TxFramesToWireless 5) medium, excluding Counter 32 Applicable to AU. Not applicable to BreezeNET B products. Read-only. The total number of unicast frames successfully transmitted to thewireless retransmissions. *TotalTransmittedConcatenatedFramesDouble ToWireless 6) Read-of Counter 32 (*TxFrames Applicable to all unitsonly. The total number double concatenated frames that were successfully transmitted to the wireless medium, excluding retransmissions. *TotalTransmittedConcatenatedFramesSingle (*TxFramesToWireless 7) s Read- the Counter 32 Applicable to all unitonly. The total number of singleconcatenated frames that weresuccessfully transmitted to wireless medium, excluding retransmissions. *TotalTransmittedConcatenatedFramesMore (*TxFramesToWireless 8) re ted to the Counter 32 Applicable to all units Read-only. The total number of concatenated frames with mothan two data frames that weresuccessfully transmitwireless medium, excludingretransmissions. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 199
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *TotalRxFramesFr(*WirelessLinkCounters 2) omWireless of ontrol and ived Counter 32 Applicable to all units. Read-only. The total number frames received from the wireless medium. The count includes data and cwireless management frames, including beacons recefrom the AU. The count does not include frames discarded internally, bad frames and duplicate frames. *TotalRetransmittedFrames (*WirelessLinkCounters 3) number of s ). Counter 32 Applicable to all units. Read-only. The total retransmissions of data frame(counts all unsuccessful transmissions/retransmissions*FramesDropped nters 4) Counter 32 (*WirelessLinkCou Applicable to all units. Read-only. The number of dropped frames. The frames retransmitted to the maximumallowed number of retransmissions without being acknowledged. *DataFramesSubmitt(*WirelessLinkCounters 5) edToBridge Submitted frames counters *DataFramesSubmittedViaHighQueue (*DataFramesSubmittedToBridge 1) Counter 32 Applicable to all units. Read-only. The number of data frames submitted to the internal bridge via the high priority queue for transmissionto the wireless medium. *DataFramesSubmittedViaMidQtedToBridgueue e 2) r of data on ess medium. ounter 32 (*DataFramesSubmit Applicable to all units. Read-only. The numbeframes submitted to the internal bridge via the mid priority queue for transmissito the wirelC*DataFramesSubmittedViaLowQueue ) (*DataFramesSubmittedToBridge 3 Applicable to all units. Read-only. The number of data frames submitted to the internal bridge via the low priority queue for transmission to the wireless medium. Counter 32 *TotalNoOfDataFramesSubmitted of n Counter 32 (*DataFramesSubmittedToBridge 4) Applicable to all units. Read-only. The total number data frames submitted to the internal bridge for transmissioto the wireless medium. *TotalRecievedDataFrames (*WirelessLinkCounters 6) Applicable to all units. Read-only. The total number data frames received from the wireless medium, including duplicate frames. of 2 Counter 3*RecievedBadFrames (*WirelessLinkCounters 7) le to all units. Read-only. The number of Applicabframes received from the wireless medium with errors (CRC errors). Counter 32 BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 200
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *NoOfDuplicateFramesDiscarded (*WirelessLinkCounters 8) Applicable to all units. Read-only. The number offrames discarded due to receiving multiple copies. Counter 32 *InternallyDiscardedMirCir (*WirelessLinkCounters 9) ta /CIR ng Counter 32 Applicable to all units. Read-only. The number of daframes received from the Ethernet port that were discarded by the MIRmechanism to avoid exceedithe maximum allowed information rate *TotalRxConcatenatedFramesDouble 0) to all units Read-double concatenated frames wireless medium, including Counter 32 (*WirelessLinkCounters 1 Applicableonly. The total number of that were received from the duplicate frames. *TotalRxConcatenatedFramesSingle (*WirelessLinkCounters 11) ere te 2 Applicable to all units Read-only. The total number of single concatenated frames that wreceived from the wireless medium, including duplicaframes. Counter 3*TotalRxConcatenatedFramesMore (*WirelessLinkCounters 12) plicate Counter 32 Applicable to all units Read-only. The total number of ore concatenated frames with mthan two data frames that werereceived from the wireless medium, including duframes. *WirelessLinkEven(*TrafficStatistics 4) ts Applicable to all units. Wirelesslink event counters. *TxEvents nkEvents 1) s. (*WirelessLi Applicable to all units. Read-only. Tx event counter*DroppedFrameEvents (*TxEvents 1) s that were use they were retransmitted to the maximum Applicable to all units. The number framedropped becaallowed number of retransmissions without beingacknowledged. Counter 32 *FramesDelayedDueToSwRetry Applicable to all units. Not applicable for units running SW version 3.0 and higher. The number of frames that were delayed because the SW retry 32 (*TxEvents 2) algorithm was activated on aprevious frame designated for the same recipient. Counter*Underrun Events (*TxEvents 3) was aborted because the rate of submitting Applicable to all units. The number of frames whose transmissionframes for transmission exceeds the available transmission capability. Counter 32 BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 201
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *OtherTxEvents (*TxEvents 4) Applicable to all units. The number of Tx events due to problems other than those represented by the other Tx Events counters. Counter 32 *TotalTxEvents (*TxEvents 5) Applicable to all units. The total number of Tx events. Counter 32 *RxEvents (*WirelessLinkEvents 2) Applicable to all units. Read-only. Rx errors counters. *PhyErrors (*RxErrors 1) Applicable to all units. Read-only. Applicable only when DFS is enabled. The number unidentified signals. of Counter 32 *CRCEvents (*RxEvents 2) rs. Counter 32 Applicable to all units. Read-only. The number of frames received from the wireless medium containing CRC erro*OverrunEvents (*RxEvents 3) rnet port. Counter 32 Applicable to all units. Read-only. The number of frames that were discarded because the receive rate exceeded the processing capability or the capacity of the Ethe*RxDecryptEvents (*RxEvents 4) Applicable to all units. Read-only. The number of frames that were not received properdue to a problem in the data decryption mechanism. ly Counter 32 *TotalRxEvents (*RxEvents 5) Counter 32 Applicable to all units. Read-only. The total number of Rx events. *PerModulationLevelCounters (*TrafficStatistics 5) Per Modulation Level Counters. *ResetPerModulationLevelCounters (*PerModulationLevelCounters 1) Integer resetCounters (1) Applicable to all units. Resets the Per Modulation Level Counters cancel (2) *SUPerModulation(*PerModulationLevLevelCountersTable elCounters 2) Applicable to SU/RB. Not accessible. The Per ModulationLevel Counters Table. *SUPerModulationLevelCountersEntry (*PerModulationLevelCountersTable 1) Applicable to SU/RB. Not accessible. An entry in the Per Modulation Level Counters Table. *SUPerModulation(*PerModulationLevLevelCountersTableIdx elCountersEntry 1) Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. The index of an entry in the Per Modulation Level Counters Table. *SUPerModulationLevelCountersApplicable ModulationLeve rsEntry 2) Integer Range: 1 to 8* ot applicable to devices with HW revision A (*PerModulationLevelCounteApplicable to SU/RB. Read-only. The modulation level applicable for the entry in the Per Modulation Level CountersTable. *Level 8 is n*SUPerModulationLevelCountersTxSuccess (*PerModulationLevelCountersEntry 3) tted unicasts at the applicable modulation level. Counter 32 Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. The total number of successfully transmi BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 202
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *SUPerModulationLevelCountersTxFailed elCountersEntry 4) -ng t the (*PerModulationLev Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The total number of failures to successfully transmit a unicast frame duria HW Retry cycle aapplicable modulation level.Counter 32 *AverageModulationLevel (*PerModulationLevelCounters 3) t Integer 1-8. Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. The average modulation level for successful transmission (rounded to nearest integer) since last reseof the Per Modulation Level counters. *MacAddressDatabase (*SiteSurvey 5) MAC Address Database *AUMacAddressDatabase atabase (*MacAddressDatabase 1) AU MAC Address D*AdbResetAllCounters (*AUMacAddressDatabase 1) Integer reset (1) noReset (2) Applicable to AU/BU. Resets all the counters for all SUs in the MAC Address Database. *AUAdbTable (*AUMacAddressDatabase 2) C able. Applicable to AU/BU. Not accessible. The AU MAAddress Database T*AUAdbEntry (*AUAdbTable 1) Applicable to AU/BU. Not accessible. An entry in the AU MAC Address Database Table. *AdbIndex (*AUAdbEntry 1) Integer Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Index of an entry inthe AU MAC Address Database Table. *AdbMacAddress (*AUAdbEntry 2) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The MAC Address of an SU entry in the AU MAC Address Database Table. MAC Address *AdbStatus (*AUAdbEntry 3) s of the Integer associated (1) d (2)ated (3) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The wireless staturelevant SU. authenticatenotAuthentic*AdbSwVersion (*AUAdbEntry 4) Display String Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The SW Version of the relevant SU. *AdbSNR ead- Integer (*AUAdbEntry 5) Applicable to AU/BU. Ronly. The average Signal to Noise Ratio in dB of frames received by the AU from the relevant SU. 0-60 *AdbMaxModulationLevel (*AUAdbEntry 6) Integer Range: 1 to 8* *Level 8 is not applicable to devices with HW revision A. Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The value configured inthe relevant SU for theMaximum Modulation Level parameter. *AdbTxFramesTotal (*AUAdbEntry 7) r t were transmitted by the AU to the relevant SU. Counter 32 Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Counts the total numbeof frames (excluding retransmissions) thaBreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 203
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *AdbDroppedFramesTotal -r out being Counter 32 (*AUAdbEntry 8) Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. Counts the total numbeof intended to the relevant SU that were dropped because they were retransmitted by the AU to the extent of the maximum allowed number of retransmissions withacknowledged. *AdbTxSuccessModLevel1 (*AUAdbEntry 9) e Counter 32 Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Counts the total number of unicast frames (excluding retransmissions) that were successfully transmitted to thSU over the wireless link using modulation level 1. *AdbTxSuccess ModLevel2 try 10) U. Read-umber nk using evel 2. Counter 32 (*AUAdbEn Applicable to AU/Bonly. Counts the total nof unicast frames (excluding retransmissions) that were successfully transmitted to theSU over the wireless limodulation l*AdbTxSuccess ModLevel3 ere d to the g 32 (*AUAdbEntry 11) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Counts the total number of unicast frames (excluding retransmissions) that wsuccessfully transmitteSU over the wireless link usinmodulation level 3. Counter*AdbTxSuccess ModLevel4 (*AUAdbEntry 12) mber mes (excluding Counter 32 Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Counts the total nuof unicast fraretransmissions) that were successfully transmitted to theSU over the wireless link using modulation level 4. *AdbTxSuccess ModLevel5 (excluding retransmissions) that were successfully transmitted to the SU over the wireless link using modulation level 5. 32 (*AUAdbEntry 13) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Counts the total number of unicast frames Counter*AdbTxSuccess ModLevel6 14) Applicable to AU/BU. Read- r hat were e Counter 32 (*AUAdbEntry only. Counts the total numbeof unicast frames (excluding retransmissions) tsuccessfully transmitted to thSU over the wireless link using modulation level 6. *AdbTxSuccess ModLevel7 (*AUAdbEntry 15) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Counts the total number of unicast frames (excluding retransmissions) that were successfully transmitted to the SU over the wireless link using modulation level 7. Counter 32 BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 204
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *AdbTxSuccess ModLevel8 unts f unicast SU over the wireless link using modulation level 8. 32 (*AUAdbEntry 16) Applicable to AU/BU. Not applicable to units with HW revision A. Read-only. Cothe total number oframes (excluding retransmissions) that were successfully transmitted to the Counter*AdbTxFailed ModLevel1 (*AUAdbEntry 17) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Counts the total number of failures to successfully modulation level 1. transmit a unicast frame intended to the SU during aHW Retry cycle using Counter 32 *AdbTxFailed ModLevel2 tal number 32 (*AUAdbEntry 18) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Counts the toof failures to successfully transmit a unicast frame intended to the SU during a HW Retry cycle using modulation level 2. Counter*AdbTxFailed ModLevel3 ntry 19) r 2 (*AUAdbE Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Counts the total numbeof failures to successfully transmit a unicast frame intended to the SU during a HW Retry cycle using modulation level 3. Counter 3*AdbTxFailed ModL(*AUAdbEntry 20) evel4 er Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Counts the total numbof failures to successfully transmit a unicast frame intended to the SU during a HW Retry cycle using modulation level 4. Counter 32 *AdbTxFailed ModLevel5 (*AUAdbEntry 21) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Counts the total number of failures to successfully transmit a unicast frame intended to the SU during a HW Retry cycle using modulation level 5. Counter 32*AdbTxFailed ModLevel6 (*AUAdbEntry 22) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Counts the total number of failures to successfully transmit a unicast frame intended to the SU during a HW Retry cycle using modulation level 6. Counter 32 *AdbTxFailed ModLevel7 (*AUAdbEntry 23) Counter 32 Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Counts the total number of failures to successfully transmit a unicast frame intended to the SU during a HW Retry cycle using modulation level 7. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 205
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *AdbTxFailed ModLevel8 Applicable to AU/BU. Not applicable to units with HW nicast g ounter 32 (*AUAdbEntry 24) revision A. Read-only. Counts the total number of failures to successfully transmit a uframe intended to the SU during a HW Retry cycle usinmodulation level 8. C*AdbCirTx (*AUAdbEntry 25) t zeNET B alue r. Integer Applicable to AU Only. Noapplicable to Breeproducts. Read-only. The vconfigured in the relevant SU for the CIR: Uplink paramete*AdbMirTx (*AUAdbEntry 26) ed in : Integer Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The value configurthe relevant SU for the MIRUplink parameter. *AdbCirRx (*AUAdbEntry 27) for the CIR: Downlink parameter. Integer Applicable to AU. Not applicable to BreezeNET B products. Read-only. The value configured in the relevant SU *AdbMirRx (*AUAdbEntry 28) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The value configured in the relevant SU for the MIR: Downlink parameter. Integer *AdbCirMaxDelay (*AUAdbEntry 29) Applicable to AU. Not applicable to BreezeNET B products. Read-only. The value configured in the relevant SU for the Maximum Delay parameter. Integer *AdbDistance (*AUAdbEntry 30) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The measured distance between the relevant SU/RB and the AU/BU (In Kilometers). Integer 1 means any distance below 2 km *AdbHwRevision (*AUAdbEntry 31) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The HW Revision of the relevant SU/RB. Integer HwRevisionA (1), HwRevisionB (2), HwRevisionC (3), na(255) *AdbCpldVer (*AUAdbEntry 32) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The CPLD Version of the relevant SU/RB. DisplayString *AdbCountryCode (*AUAdbEntry 33) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Country Code of the relevant SU/RB. Integer *AdbBootVer (*AUAdbEntry 34) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Boot Version of the relevant SU/RB. DisplayString *AdbAtpcOption (*AUAdbEntry 35) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The current ATPC Option of the relevant SU/RB. Integer disable (1), enable (2), na(255) BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 206
breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *AdbAd Option (*AUAdb 6) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The current Adaptive Modulation Option of the relevant SU/RB. Integer disable (1), enable (2), na(255) apModEntry 3*AdbBurstModeOption (*AUAdbEntry 37) Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The current Burst Mode Option of the relevant SU/RB. Integer disable (1), enable (2), na(255) *AdbConcatenationOption (*AUAdbEntr Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The current Concatenation Option of the ant SU/RB. Integer disable (1), enable (2), 55) y 39) relev na(2*AdbSecurityMode le to AU/BU. only. The current Security evant SU/RB. er wep (1), 255) (*AUAdbEntry 41) Applicab Read- IntegMode of the rel aes (2), na(*AdbAuthOption y 42) AU/BU. Read-only. The current Authentication Algorithant SU/RBInteger nSystem(1),redKey (2), na(255) (*AUAdbEntr Applicable tom opeshaOption of the relev . *AdbDataEncryptOption (*AUAdbEntry 43) /BU. rrent Datation of th. Integer disable (1), enable (2), 55) Applicable to AUonly. The cu Read- Encryption Oprelevant SU/RB e na(2*AdbAge (*AUAdbEntry 44) /BU. coivineva Applicable to AUonly. The time in seelapsed since receRead- Integer nds g the last packet from the relSU/RB. nt *AdbUnitName (*AUAdbEntry 45) Applicable to AU/BU. only. The Unit Name orelevant SU/RB. splayString Read-f the Di*UpLinkQualityIndicator 6) atoabl (*SiteSurvey UpLink quality Indicparameters. ApplicSU/RB. r (LQI) e only to *MeasureUpLinkQualityIndicualityIndicator 1) ator . hee for a period s. er start (1), cancel (2) (*UpLinkQ Applicable to SU/RBcalculation of LQI. Tcalculation will bStarts Integ of 10 second*ReadUpLinkQualityIn(*UpLinkQualityIndicatodicator r 2) SU/RB. Read-ults of the . Applicable toonly. The res last LQI Integer 1-8calculation. *UpLinkQualityIndicatorStatus alityIndicator 3) Odere are n the range of n levels, evels used. s that the cate the since the available range is limited - by HW (HW Revision A), or by the applicable parameters in the country code, or by the configurable Maximum Modulation Level parameter. Integer fullTest (1), limitedTest (2) (*UpLinkQu Applicable to SU/RBIndicates the test confullTest means that thno limitations oavailable modulatioand that all modulation lfrom 1 to 8 can be limitedTest indicateresults may not inditrue qualitynly. itions. *MacPinpoint (*SiteSurvey 7) Applicable to AU/BU. MAC Pinpoint parameters. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 207
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *MacPinpointTable nt 1) /BU. accessible. (*MacPinpoi Applicable to AUPinpoint table. Not MAC *MacPinpointEntry (MacPinpointTable 1) . An entry Pinpoint table. Not ch entry rnet station and the MAC wireless device t to th Applicable to AU/BUin the MACaccessible. Eacontains an EtheMAC addressaddress of theused to connect iwireless network e MptEthernetStationMACAddress (*MacPinpointEntry 1) U/BU only. AC address of the Ethernet stationused as an index in thPinpoint Table. MAC address Applicable to ARead only. The M . It is e MAC MptUnitMACAddress (*MacPinpointEntry 2) Applicable to AU/BU oRead only. The MAC aof the wireless device the station with the MAAddress from the indeto access the wireless network MAC address nly. ddress used by C x in order BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 208
Supported Traps E.3 Supported Traps NOTE An * is used instead of the brzaccVL prefix. E.3.1 Trap Variables MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *Traps (breezeAccessVLMib 14) *TrapSUMacAddr (*Traps 1) ASU/RB MAC address. MAC address pplicable to AU/BU. An *TrapText A ll units. Textual string for future use. DisplayString (*Traps 3) pplicable to a*TrapToggle (*Traps 4) A s. An O on (1) off (2) pplicable to all unitn/Off toggle status. Integer*TrapParameterChanged (*Traps 5) AmpFiltering, MIR/CIR or VLAN. Integer cirOrMir (1) ipFilter (2) vlan (3) pplicable to all units. A odification to one of the arameters related to IP *TrapAccessRights (*Traps 6) A nits. The anotLoggedIn (1) readOnly (2) r (3) pplicable to all uccess rights used for login. Integer installeadministrator (4) factory (5) *TrapLog (*Traps 7) A Login or logout to the Monitor pInteger telnetLogin (1) telnetLogout (2) pplicable to all units.rogram Telnet. *TrapTelnetUserIpAddress (*Traps 8) A IP a ser. IP address pplicable to all units. The ddress of a Telnet u*TrapRTx (*Traps 9) ARpplicable to AU/BU. etransmissions rate. *TrapFtpOrTftpStatus (*Traps 10) AT t F . successful (1) failed (2) pplicable to all units. he status of the lasTP/TFTP loading process*TrapDFSMoveFreq (*Traps 11) A with HWr r units w and h* req New to sM y in M on applicable to AU/BUevision B and lower (foith HW revision Cigher replaced by TrapDFSMoveF Integer upport a resolution of 0.5 Hz). The new frequencHz after detecting radar previous channel. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 209
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps MIB Parameter Description Value/Range *TrapDFSMoveFreqNew (*Traps 12) A The n r dc ces *s .5 Mr pplicable to AU/BU. ew frequency in MHz afteetecting radar on a previous hannel. (ReplaTrapDFSMoveFreq to upport a resolution of 0Hz for units with HW evision C and higher). DisplayString *EthBroadcastThresholdExceeded (*Traps 13) A . The n ere db ulticast limiter. Integer pplicable to all unitsumber of packets that wropped by the Ethernet roadcast/m*TrapSubscriberType (*trap 14) A he t as r S cSsInteger rType(0), su-3(3) su-6(6), rb-14(14), su-24(24), rb-28(28), su-54(54) pplicable to AUS only. Type of subscriber that wejected by the AUS (AUan serve up to SUs. Only U-3 and SU-6 are upported). unknownSubscribeE.3.2 Private Traps Trap (Number) Description Variables *SUassociatedAUTRAP (2) An AU/BU trap indicating a new association with an SU/RB. *TrapSUMacAddr *AUdisassociatedTRAP (3) An AU/BU trap indicating that an SU/RB has been disassociated from the AU/BU. The AU/BU decides that an SU/RB has been disassociated from it and remove it from the ADB after receiving from another AU/BU a SNAP frame with the SU/RB MAC address. The SNAP frame indicating a network topology change where the SU/RB has associated with another AU/BU will be received if both AUs/BUs are connected to the same Ethernet backbone. *TrapSUMacAddr BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 210
Supported Traps Trap (Number) Description Variables *AUagingTRAP (4) An AU/BU trap indicating that an SU/RB aged out and was removed from the Associations database following its failure to acknowledge a specified number of consecutive frames. *TrapSUMacAddr *SUassociatedTRAP (6) An SU/RB trap indicating association with an AU/BU. In the average SNR of frames received from the AU/BU. *AssociatedAU addition to the MAC address information of the AU/BU, the trap also includes information on *AU An AU/BU trap, indicating that the quality of the wireless *TrapToggle *TrapRTx wirelessQualityTRAP (20) link has changed and dropped below (Off) or increased above (On) a threshold defined by the *WirelessTrapThreshold. *PowerUpFromReset (101) indicating power up after reset. An AU/BU trap *UnitMacAddress *MonitorStatusTRAP (102) Applicable to all units. A trap indicating that a log-in or log-out has been performed via Telnet. Includes the login access right and the IP address of the PC performing Telnet. *TrapLog *TrapAccessRights *TrapTelnetUserIpAddress *ParameterChangedTRAP(103) Applicable to all units. A trap indicating a change in CIR/MIR, IP Filter or VLAN parameter. *TrapParameterChanged *LoadingStatusTRAP(104) Applicable to all units. A trap indicating the results (successful or failed) of the last FTP/TFTP loading process. *TrapFtpOrTftpStatus *UnitMacAddress *PromiscuousModeTRAP (105) An AU/BU trap indicating that promiscuous mode was enabled (on) or disabled (off) *TrapToggle *UnitMacAddress *DFSRadarDetectedTRAP (106) An AU/BU trap indicating that radar was detected *UnitMacAddress *DFSFrequencyTRAP (107) An AU/BU trap indicating the new frequency after radar was detected. *UnitMacAddress *TrapDFSMoveFreq BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 211
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps Trap (Number) Description Variables *DFSNoFreeChannelsExistTRAP (An AU/BU trap cating that radar was o *UnitMacAddress 108) indidetected and there is nfree channel. *EthBroa imiterTRAP (nits. the ed contains the that ropped since the last trap. *UnitMacAddress *EthBroadcastThresholdExceededdcastMulticatL109) Applicable for all uThe trap is send if Ethernet broadcast filter threshold is exceedand it number of packetswere d*USUnsupportedSubscr R(110) nly. bscriber unit t he AUS . cAddr *TrapSubscriberType iberTypeT AP Applicable to AUS oThis trap is generated when a suthat is not supportedtries to associate with the AUS. T supports only up to 5SU-3 and/or SU-6 units*TrapSUMa BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 212
FF App F Summary endix - Parameters In This Appendix:  The tables provide an at a glance summary of the configurable parameters, value ranges, and default values. In addition, each parameter entry also includes an indication as to whether the parameter is updated in run-time or whether the unit must be reset before the modification takes effect.
Appendix F - Parameters Summary F.1 Unit Control Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time Change Unit Name printable ASCII AU, SU Up to 32 characters None Yes Change Read Only table ASCII Password AU, SU Up to 8 princharacters public No Change Installer AU, SU Up to 8 printable ASCII user No Password characters Change Administrator Password AU, SU le ASCII private No Up to 8 printabcharacters FTP SW Version AU, SU le ASCII characters. An empty string VxWorks.bz Yes Up to 20 printabFile Name is not allowed. Configuration File Name AU, SU g onfig.cfg Yes Up to 20 printable ASCII characters. An empty strin cis not allowed. Operator Defaults File Name AU, SU characters. An empty string is not allowed. operator.cmr Yes Up to 20 printable ASCII FTP Source Dir AU, SU Up to 80 printable ASCII characters. Use “.” to clear. None (empty) Yes FTP Client IP Address AU, SU IP address 1.1.1.3 No FTP Client IP Mask AU, SU IP address 255.255.255.0 No FTP Server IP Address AU, SU IP address 1.1.1.4 No FTP Gateway IP Address AU, SU IP address 0.0.0.0 No FTP User Name AU, SU Up to 18 printable ASCII characters vx No FTP Password AU, SU Up to 18 printable ASCII characters Vx No FTP Log File Name AU, SU Up to 20 printable ASCII characters logfile.log Yes FTP Log File Destination Directory AU, SU Up to 80 printable ASCII characters. Use “.” to clear. None (empty) Yes Event Log Policy AU, SU  Message  Warning  Error  Fatal  Log None Warning Yes Log Out Timer AU, SU 1-999 minutes 5 Yes BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 214
Unit Control Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time Ethernet PorNegotiation Mode AU, SU  Force 10 Mbps and Half-Duplex nd l-Duplex e 100 Mbps and Half-Duplex l-Duplex Negotiation Auto Negotiation No t  Force 10 Mbps aFul Forc Force 100 Mbps and Ful AutoChange System Location AU, SU rs None Yes Up to 34 printable ASCII characteManual FeaUpgrade ture U, SU nse string: 32 to 64 hexadecimal digits None No A LiceBreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 215
Appendix F - Parameters Summary F.2 IP Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time IP Address AU, SU IP address 10.0.0.1 No Subnet Mask AU, SU 5.0.0.0 No IP address 25Default GatewaAddress y AU, SU IP address 0.0.0.0 No DHCP Option AU, SU le No  Disable  DHCP Only  Automatic DisabAccess to DHCP AU, SU Ethernet Only Both Wireless and U: From Ethernet Only SU: From Wireless Only No  From Wireless Only From FromEthernet A BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 216
Air Interface Parameters F.3 Air Interface Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time ESSID AU, SU Up to 31 printable ASCII ESSID1 No characters Operator ESSID Option AU Enable No  Disable  Enable Operator ESSID AU Up to 31 printable ASCII ESSID1 No characters Best AU Support SU  Disable No  Disable Enable Number of Scanning Attempts SU 4 No 1 – 255 Preferred AU MAC Address SU 00-00-00-00-00-00 (no preferred AU) Yes MAC Address Scanning Mode SU Pas Passive No sive, Active Cell DistanceMode Manual Automatic AU Automatic, No Maximum Cell AU 0-54 (Km) n 0 (no compensation) Yes Distance 0 means no compensatio Fairness Factor AU 100 (%) 100 (%) No 0 –Arbitration InFrame S ter-pacing AU, SU  1 time slot ots Yes  2 time sl2 time slots Wireless Trap Threshold AU 1-100 (%) 30 (%) Yes Maximum Number of AU 1-512 (1-124 if Data Encryption Option is 51 enabled). 2 Yes Associations Sub-Band Select* AU, SU 1, 2 1 No Frequency AU 4947.5 - 4982.5 MHz, 5MHz steps 4947.5 MHz No Frequency Subset Definition (in SU) SU According to the Sub-Band. A list of frequency indexes or A for all frequencies supported by the Sub-Band A (All) No Country Code Learning by SU AU  Disable  Enable Enable Yes Tx Power For Modulation Levels 1 to 5 AU, SU -10 dBm to a value determined by Sub-Band The highest allowed value Yes Tx Power For Modulation Level 6 AU, SU -10 dBm to a value determined by the Sub-Band. The highest allowed value Yes Tx Power For Modulation Level 7 AU, SU -10 dBm to a value determined by the Sub-Band The highest allowed value Yes BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 217
Appendix F - Parameters Summary Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time Tx Power For Modulation Level AU, SU -10 dBm to a value determined by the Sub-BThe highest allowed value Yes 8 and Max Tx Power For Modulation S -10 dBm to a value determined by the Sub-BThe highest allowed value YeLevels 1 to 5 U and s Max Tx PoFor Modulatiower n S -determined by the Sub-Band Thvalue YeLevel 6 U 10 dBm to a value e highest allowed s Max Tx Power For Modulation Level 7 SU -d Sub-BThe highest allowed value Yes 10 dBm to a value etermined by theand Max Tx Power SU -dBand he highest allowed al Yes For Modulation Level 8 10 dBm to a value Sub- Tvetermined by the ue ATPC Option A En YeU, SU Disable Enable able s Delta from Minimum SNR Level AU 4-20 11 dB Yes (dB) Minimum SNR Level A 4-60 (dB) 28 (dB) YeU s Minimum Interval Between A 1 seconds) 30 (seconds) YeU -3600 ( s ATPC Messages ATPC Power Level Steps AU 1 4 Yes -20 (dB) Tx Control AU On Yes (unit is reset automatically) Off On Antenna Gain AU, SU*** 0 – 50 AU: According to the an ied with the unit. SU-E: NA No (dB) tenna supplSpectrum Analysis Channel Scan Period AU, SU 2 5 secon No – 30 seconds ds Spectrum Analysis Scan Cycles AU, SU 1 – 100 c 2 c No ycles ycles Automatic AU  Disable  Enable Disable No (Co red per analysis) Channel Selection nfiguLost Beacons Watchdog Threshold AU 1Used 218 Yes 00 – 1000, 0 means Not *** Configurable on gral antenna. ly in units without an inte BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 218
Network Management Parameters F.4 Network Management Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time Access to Network AU, SU  From Wireless Link Only ly  Ethernet and nk From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link No Management  From Ethernet OnFrom Both Wireless LiNetwork AU, SU  Activate Management IP  ireless Port nagement IP ss Ports Disable No Management Filtering Disable Filter On Ethernet Port Activate Management IP Filter On W Activate MaFilter On Both Ethernet and WireleSet Network Management IP Address AU, SU IP address 0.0.0.0 (all 10 entries) No Set/Change Network Management IP Address Ranges AU, SU <start address> to <end address> or, <base address> mask <mask> 0.0.0.0 TO 0.0.0.0 (all 10 entries) No Send SNMP Traps AU, SU  Disable  Enable Disable Yes SNPM Traps IP Destination AU, SU IP address 0.0.0.0 (all 10 entries) No SNMP Traps Community AU, SU Up to 14 printable ASCII characters public (all 10 entries) No BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 219
Appendix F - Parameters Summary F.5 Bridge Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time VLAN ID-Data SU 1 – 4094 No 1 VMo VLAN) LAN ID – anagement AU, SU 1 – 4094, 65535 65535 (n No V pe AU, SU  unk Link ccess Link (only in SU) Hybrid Link No LAN Link Ty Hybrid Link  Tr AVSDisable, Enable le LAN Forwarding upport AU, SU Disab No VID 1 – 4094 0 entries) y list LAN Forwarding AU, SU (up to 2 Empt No VLAN RelaySEnable le ing upport AU Disable, Disab No V 1 – 409(up to 20 entries) y list LAN Relaying ID AU 4 Empt No VLAN Prior – Data ity SU 0 – 7 0 No VLAN PriorMity – anagement AU, SU 0 – 7 0 No Ethernet Broadcast F s  Disab On Ethernet Port Only ort Only  On Both Wireless and Ethernet Ports iltering Option SU le,  On Wireless PDisable Yes D ast O r SU  Disable Disable Yes HCP Broadcteverride Fil Enable PPPoE Broadcast OSU Disable Yes  Disable verride Filter  Enable ARP Broadcast Override F SU  Enable Yes  Disable ilterEnable EBroadcast/Multicast Limiter Option AU, SU  Disable  Limit only Broadcast Packets  Limit Multicast Packets that are not Broadcasts  Limit All Multicast Packets (including broadcast) Disable Yes thernet Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Threshold AU, SU 0 – 204800 (packets/second) 50 Yes BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 220
Bridge Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time Ethernet ticasap AU, SU 1 – 60 (minutes) 5 (minutes) Yes Broadcast/Mul t Limiter Send TrInterval Bridge Aging Time AU, SU 300 No 20 – 2000 seconds Broadcast Relaying AU Enable No Disable, Enable Unicast Relaying AU able No  Disable En Enable MAC Address Deny List AU on s Up to 100 MAC addresses N e (empty) YeRoaming Option SU  Disable Disab No le  Enable Ethernet Port SU Enable Yes  Disable Control  Enable BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 221
Appendix F - Parameters Summary F.6 Performance Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time RTS Threshold 20 – 4032 (bytes) AU: SU: 60 AU, SU 4032 Yes Minimum Contention Window AU, SU 3, 127, 255, 511, 1023 15 Yes 0, 7, 15, 31, 6Maximum Contention Window AU, SU 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511, 1023 1023 Yes Maximum Modulation Level AU, SU 1 - 8 8 Yes Multicast Modulation Level AU 1 - 8 1 Yes Number of HW Retries AU, SU 1 - 15 10 Yes Average SNR Memory Factor AU, SU -1 to 32 5 Yes Burst Mode Option AU, SU  Disable  Enable Enable No Burst Mode Time Interval AU, SU 1 to 10 (milliseconds) 5 milliseconds Yes Adaptive Modulation Option AU, SU  Disable  Enable Enable No Minimum Interval Between Adaptive Modulation Messages AU, SU 1-3600 (seconds) 4 (seconds) Yes Adaptive Modulation Decisión Threshold AU, SU  Normal  High Normal No Concatenation Option AU, SU  Disable  Enable Enable No Maximum Number of Frames AU, SU 2 – 8 frames 8 No BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 222
Service Parameters F.7 Service Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time User Filtering Option SU  Disable  IP Protocol Only ined Addresses Only Protocol Only  User Def PPPoE Disable YesSet/Change Filter IP Address Ranges <start address> to <end address> mask <mask> 0 TO 0.0.0.0 (all 8 entries) SU 0.0.0. No or, <base address>DHCP Unicast r SU CP Unicast Enable DHCP Unicast Disable DHCP nicast Yes Disable DHOverride Filte   UMIR: Downlink SU No 128-53888 (Kbps) 53888 (Kbps) MIR: Uplink SU ps) bps) No 128-53888 (Kb 53888 (KCIR: Downlink SU s) 0 (Kbps) No 0-45056 (KbpCIR: Uplink SU 0-45056 (Kbps) 0 (Kbps) No Maximum Delay SU 300 – 10,000 (ms) 5,000 (ms) No Maximum Burst Duration AU, SU 0 – 2,000 (ms) 5 (ms) No Graceful Degradation Limit AU 0 – 70 (%) 70 (%) No MIR Only Option AU  Disable  Enable Enable No VLAN Priority Threshold AU, SU 0 – 7 7 No ToS Prioritization Option AU, SU  Disable  Enable IP Precedence (RFC791) Prioritization  Enable DSCP (RFC2474) Prioritization Disable No IP Precedence Threshold AU, SU 0 – 7 7 No DSCP Threshold AU, SU 0 – 63 63 No UDP/TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option AU, SU  Disable  Enable Only for UDP  Enable Only for TCP  Enable for both UDP and TCP Disable No BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 223
Appendix F - Parameters Summary Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time UDP RTP/RTCP Prioritization AU, SU  RTP & RTCP  RTP Only RTP & RTCP No TCP RTP/RTCP Prioritization AU, SU  RTP & RTCP  RTP Only RTP & RTCP No BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 224
Security Parameters F.8 Security Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time Authentication Algorithm* AU, SU  Open system  Shared Key Open system No Data Encryption Option* AU, SU  Disable  Enable Disable No Security Mode* AU, SU  WEP WEP No  AES/OCB  AES/CCM Default Key SU 1-4 1 No Default AU 1-4 Multicast Key 1 No Key # 1 to Key # 4 AU, SU 32 hexadecimal digits 0…0 (all 0=no key) No Promiscuous Authentication AU  Disable  Enable Disable Yes (Disable after reset) BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 225
GG Appendix G - Using the Feature License Web Application
Appendix G - Using the Feature License Web Application G.1 The Feature License Web Application Certain features of BreezeACCESS 4900 products may be upgraded through loading special feature license strings. When you receive the invoice for new license(s) purchased, use the Alvarion web site for getting license strings for specific products. To access the Feature License Application: 1 In the Alvarion web site (www.alvarion.com), select the Customer Service option. 2 In the Customer Service page, select the Service Call Entry option. 3 In the User Login form, enter your User ID and Password and click Login. 4 Select SSM - Customer Service Area. 5 Select the Feature License option. The Get Feature License Key form with the current status of your licenisplayed. se(s) is d BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 228
The Feature License Web Application To s on the updated status of your licenses: ted status of the Thestrget detailCheck on the License Key Enquiry button to get the updalicenses. displayed information includes account history with details on all license ings that were provided. To 1 get a License Key for a single device: Check the required feature license entry and click on the Get Key button. TheEnter MAC Address form will be displayed: 2 Enter the MAC Address of the device you want to upgrade. 3 Click on the Get Key button. The License Key for the device will be displayed. NOTE An error message will be displayed upon requesting a key for a non-valid MAC address. To get License Keys for multiple devices: This feature enables you to load a list of MAC Addresses from a pre-prepared Excel file. NOTE The Excel file should contain a single column of MAC addresses (no empty cells). This must be column A, starting at row 1, which is the title row. 1 Check the required feature license and click on Upload MAC Address List from Excel button. The Get MAC Addresses from Excel File form will be displayed: BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 229
Appendix G - Using the Feature License Web Application NOTE You may need to change your Browser security settings. For details press the Change Security Level link in the form. 2 Use the browser or enter the path to the MAC addresses file. Enter the MAC address of the device you want to upgrade. 3 Click on the Import File button to get a list of License Keys for the devices included in the Excel file. NOTE An error message will be displayed upon requesting a key for a non-valid MAC address. G.1.1 Loading License Strings to Devices To upgrade a single device: There are several methods of loading a feature license string to a single device:  Using Telnet: Use the Feature Upgrade option in the Unit Control menu.  Using TFTP: Use the file with the extension “.fln” for feature license strings. Refer to Appendix B (File Upload and Download Using TFTP) for more details. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 230
The Feature License Web Application  Using BreezeCONFIG: Enter the license string in the Feature Upgrade field of the Unit Control window. Refer to the BreezeCONFIG User Manualdetails. for more To upgrade multiple devices using a feature licenses file:  Using TFTP: Use the file with the extension “.fln” for feature licenRefer to Appendix Bse strings. (File Upload and Download Using TFTP) for more details. Note that Feature license files include multiple strings, where each string is applicable only for a certain unit identified by its MAC address. When uploading a e to multiple units, each unit it.  Using BreezeCONFIG: Use the File Loading Utility. Refer to the BreezeCONFIG User Manual for more details. feature license or a country code filwill accept only the parts that are applicable for NOTE After completing loading process, reset the unit(s) to apply the change. Use the Info Screens menu (Show Unit Status) to verify that the unit has been upgraded. BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 231
HH Appendix H - Troubleshooting
Appendix H - Troubleshooting H.1 Ethernet Port Connection Problems Problem and Indication Possible Cause Corrective Action Wrong type of Ethernet cable If connected directly to PC-use a crossed cable. Otherwise-use a straight cable The Ethernet Integrity Indica(the yellow LED embedded tor y d re Faulty Ethernet cable Rinthe Ethernet connector) is off, and/or the Ethernet ActivitIndicator (the green embeddeLED) does not blink when theshould be traffic on the Ethernet port. eplace cable Wrong IP configuration Make sure that the PC is on the same subnet as the unit*. The unit does not respond to ping. et port Wrong Ethernoperation mode Make sure that the speed andsettings in the PC match the configuration in the unit (the default is Auto Negotiation) duplex * If the IP parameters of the known, s utility to restore the default factory c p eneral FTP parameters and AU’s F P ad s of the unit after setting to factory defaults is 10.0.0.1. unit are unonfiguration of all requency). The Iuse the Set Factory Defaultarameters (except to Passwords, gdres BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 234
SU Association Problems H.2 SU Association Problems Problem and Indication Possible Cause Corrective Action Wrong configur Check proper configuration of basic parameters:  ESSID  Sub-band and frequencies subset  Best AU parameters  ATPC Option  Transmit Power  Maximum Transmit Power  Antenna Gain  Security parameters: Authentication Algorithm, and Default Key. If necessary-use Promiscuous Mode in AU. ation Access is denied by AU Verify that the SU is not included in MAC Address Deny List of the AU. S AU Link quality is too low  Verify that unit is in coverage area of AU according to radio planning.  Verify that antenna is directed toward the AU  Try to improve location/height of antenna. U does not associate withBreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 235
Appendix H - Troubleshooting BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 236 H.3 Low Throughput Problems Problem and Indication Possible Cause Corrective Action Ethernet link problems  Verify proper settings of Ethernet operation mode (actual Ethernet speed of 100 Mbps).  Check Ethernet counters Low throughput is suspected (Check the dominant Modulation Level in Per rate Counters and see expected throughput in the “Expected Throughput” table below) Wrong configuration of Maximum Modulation level Verify that Maximum Modulation level is not set to a value that is not too low according to the “Recommended Maximum Modulation Level” table below. Low throughput of multicast/broadcast traffic Non-optimal configuration of Multicast Modulation level A value that is too low (see the “Recommended Maximum Modulation Level” table below) may degrade throughput of broadcast and multicast traffic. High retransmissions rate Interference problems (retransmissions rate in excess of 15%) Check for interference using the Spectrum Analysis Mode. If necessary, change the operating frequency of the AU. Expected Throughput in Mbps, TCP session, Burst Mode Disabled Modulation Level Expected Throughput (Mbps) @ 10 MHz Bandwidth 1 2.40 2 3.57 3 4.69 4 6.76 5 8.76 6 12.02 7 14.13 8 14.25
Low Throughput Problems BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual 237 Recommended Maximum Modulation Level* SNR Maximum Modulation Level SNR > 23 dB 8 21 dB < SNR < 23 dB 7 16 dB< SNR < 21 dB 6 13 dB < SNR < 16 dB 5 10 dB < SNR < 13 dB 4 8 dB < SNR < 10 dB 3 7 dB < SNR < 8 dB 2 6 dB < SNR < 7 dB 1

Navigation menu